WO2016196124A2 - Prodrugs comprising a pyroglutamate linker - Google Patents

Prodrugs comprising a pyroglutamate linker Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016196124A2
WO2016196124A2 PCT/US2016/034105 US2016034105W WO2016196124A2 WO 2016196124 A2 WO2016196124 A2 WO 2016196124A2 US 2016034105 W US2016034105 W US 2016034105W WO 2016196124 A2 WO2016196124 A2 WO 2016196124A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
formula
poly
alkyl
group
independently
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2016/034105
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2016196124A3 (en
Inventor
Harald Rau
Nicola BISEK
Samuel WEISBROD
Original Assignee
Ascendis Pharma Inc.
Ascendis Pharma A/S
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ascendis Pharma Inc., Ascendis Pharma A/S filed Critical Ascendis Pharma Inc.
Priority to EP16804033.5A priority Critical patent/EP3303365A4/en
Priority to US15/577,606 priority patent/US11298427B2/en
Publication of WO2016196124A2 publication Critical patent/WO2016196124A2/en
Publication of WO2016196124A3 publication Critical patent/WO2016196124A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/62—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid
    • A61K47/64—Drug-peptide, drug-protein or drug-polyamino acid conjugates, i.e. the modifying agent being a peptide, protein or polyamino acid which is covalently bonded or complexed to a therapeutically active agent
    • A61K47/645—Polycationic or polyanionic oligopeptides, polypeptides or polyamino acids, e.g. polylysine, polyarginine, polyglutamic acid or peptide TAT
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/56—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule
    • A61K47/59—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyureas or polyurethanes
    • A61K47/60—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule obtained otherwise than by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. polyureas or polyurethanes the organic macromolecular compound being a polyoxyalkylene oligomer, polymer or dendrimer, e.g. PEG, PPG, PEO or polyglycerol
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound

Definitions

  • EP 15169843.8 filed on May 29, 2015, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • the present invention relates to novel prodrugs of primary or secondary amine-comprising biologically active moieties and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, prodrug reagents, pharmaceutical compositions comprising said prodrugs and the use of said prodrugs.
  • prodrug reagents To improve physicochemical or pharmacokinetic properties of a drug in vivo such drug can be conjugated to a carrier.
  • carriers in drug delivery are either used in non-covalent complexation of drug and carrier, or by covalent attachment of a carrier reagent to one of the drug‘s functional groups.
  • non-covalent approach requires a highly efficient drug-carrier complexation to prevent uncontrolled, burst-type release of the drug due to disintegration of the drug-carrier complex after administration. Restraining the diffusion of an unbound, water soluble drug molecule requires strong van der Waals contacts, frequently mediated through hydrophobic moieties and charged moieties for electrostatic binding. Many conformationally sensitive drugs, such as proteins or peptides, are rendered dysfunctional during the complexation process and/or during subsequent storage of the non-covalently bound drug..
  • a drug may be covalently conjugated to a carrier via a stable linker or a reversible prodrug linker moiety from which the drug is released.
  • conjugates are referred to as carrier-linked prodrugs.
  • carrier-linked prodrugs may exhibit no or little drug activity, i.e. the carrier-linked prodrug is pharmacologically inactive.
  • the biologically active moiety of such a carrier-linked prodrug can be released by enzymatic or non-enzymatic cleavage of the linkage between the carrier and the biologically active moiety, or by a sequential combination of both.
  • enzyme-dependence is usually less preferred, because enzyme levels may vary significantly between patients what makes the correct dosing difficult.
  • Various non-enzymatically cleavable reversible prodrug linkers are known in the art, such as for example those disclosed in WO2005/099768 A2, WO2006/136586 A2, WO2009/095479 A2, WO2011/012722 A1, WO2011/089214 A1, WO2011/089216 A1 and WO2011/089215 A1.
  • a prodrug or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof comprising a conjugate D-L, wherein -D is a primary or secondary amine-comprising biologically active moiety; and -L comprises a linker moiety -L 1 represented by formula (I)
  • -X 1 is selected from the group consisting of -CR 5 R 5a -, -O-, -NR 5 - and -S-; -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a are independently of other selected from -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl, C 1-6 alkynyl; wherein C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl, C 1-6 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more R 6 , which are the same or different; and wherein C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl, C 1-6 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)
  • each T is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered
  • one or more of the pairs -R 1 /-R 1a , -R 2 /-R 3 , -R 5 /-R 5a and -R 4 /-R 4a are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10- membered heterocyclyl or a 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl;
  • pairs -R 1 /-R 2 , -R 1 /-R 3 , -R 1 /-R 5 , -R 1 /-R 5a , -R 1a /-R 2 , -R 1a /-R 3 , -R 1a /-R 5 , -R 1a /-R 5a , -R 2 /-R 5 , -R 2 /-R 5a , -R 3 /-R 5 , -R 3 /-R 5a are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring -A-; -A- is selected from the group consisting of phenyl; naphthyl; indenyl; indanyl;
  • tetralinyl C 3-10 cycloalkyl; 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl; and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein -L 1 is substituted with one to five moieties -L 2 -Z, preferably -L 1 is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z, and is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (I) is not replaced by a substituent; wherein -L 2 - is a single chemical bond or a spacer moiety; and -Z is a carrier moiety.
  • the reversible prodrug linker moiety -L 1 - of formula (I) has advantageous properties, such as an increased stability of the activated corresponding reagent under conditions particularly beneficial for the conjugation of proteins.
  • drug refers to a substance used in the treatment, cure, prevention, or diagnosis of a disease or used to otherwise enhance physical or mental well-being. If a drug is conjugated to another moiety, the part of the resulting product that originated from the drug is referred to as“biologically active moiety”.
  • the term“primary or secondary amine-comprising drug” refers to a drug having at least one primary or secondary amine functional group, respectively, which primary or secondary amine-comprising drug may optionally have one or more further functional group(s) including one or more additional primary and/or secondary amine functional group(s). If such primary or secondary amine-comprising drug is conjugated to, for example, a moiety -L 1 , it is referred to as“primary or secondary amine-comprising biologically active moiety”, even though it is understood that said primary or secondary amine functional group became part of the amide bond connecting both moieties.
  • prodrug or“carrier-linked prodrug” refers to a biologically active moiety reversibly and covalently connected to a specialized protective group through a reversible prodrug linker moiety comprising a reversible linkage with the biologically active moiety to alter or to eliminate undesirable properties in the parent molecule. This also includes the enhancement of desirable properties in the drug and the suppression of undesirable properties.
  • the specialized non-toxic protective group is referred to as“carrier”.
  • a prodrug releases it reversibly and covalently bound biologically active moiety in the form of its corresponding drug.
  • A“biodegradable linkage” or a“reversible linkage” is a linkage that is hydrolytically degradable, i.e. cleavable, in the absence of enzymes under physiological conditions (aqueous buffer at pH 7.4, 37°C) with a half-life ranging from one hour to twelve months.
  • a“permanent linkage” is not hydrolytically degradable, i.e. cleavable, in the absence of enzymes under physiological conditions (aqueous buffer at pH 7.4, 37°C) with a half-life of less than twelve months.
  • the term“traceless prodrug linker” means a reversible prodrug linker which upon cleavage releases the drug in its free form.
  • the term“free form” of a drug means the drug in its unmodified, pharmacologically active form.
  • the reversible prodrug linker of the present invention, L 1 is a traceless prodrug linker.
  • excipient refers to a diluent, adjuvant, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered.
  • Such pharmaceutical excipient can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, including but not limited to peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water is a preferred excipient when the pharmaceutical composition is administered orally.
  • Saline and aqueous dextrose are preferred excipients when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously.
  • Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions are preferably employed as liquid excipients for injectable solutions.
  • Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, trehalose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like.
  • the pharmaceutical composition can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, like, for example, acetate, succinate, tris, carbonate, phosphate, HEPES (4- (2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid), MES (2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid), or can contain detergents, like Tween, poloxamers, poloxamines, CHAPS, Igepal, or amino acids like, for example, glycine, lysine, or histidine.
  • pH buffering agents like, for example, acetate, succinate, tris, carbonate, phosphate, HEPES (4- (2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid), MES (2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid
  • detergents like Tween, poloxamers, poloxamines, CHAPS, Igepal, or amino acids like, for example, g
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and excipients such as triglycerides.
  • Oral formulation can include standard excipients such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc.
  • Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the drug or biologically active moiety, together with a suitable amount of excipient so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient.
  • the formulation should suit the mode of administration.
  • the term“hydrogel” means a hydrophilic or amphiphilic polymeric network composed of homopolymers or copolymers, which is insoluble due to the presence of covalent chemical crosslinks.
  • the crosslinks provide the network structure and physical integrity. Hydrogels exhibit a thermodynamic compatibility with water which allows them to swell in aqueous media.
  • the term“reagent” means a chemical compound which comprises at least one functional group for reaction with the functional group of another chemical compound or drug. It is understood that a drug comprising a functional group (such as a primary or secondary amine functional group) is also a reagent.
  • the term“backbone reagent” means a reagent, which is suitable as a starting material for forming hydrogels. As used herein, a backbone reagent preferably does not comprise biodegradable linkages.
  • a backbone reagent may comprise a“branching core” which term refers to an atom or moiety to which more than one other moiety is attached.
  • the term“crosslinker reagent” means a linear or branched reagent, which is suitable as a starting material for crosslinking backbone reagents.
  • the crosslinker reagent is a linear chemical compound.
  • a crosslinker reagent preferably comprises at least one biodegradable linkage.
  • the term“moiety” means a part of a molecule, which lacks one or more atom(s) compared to the corresponding reagent.
  • the corresponding moiety of the reaction product has the structure“H–X–“ or“–X–“ , whereas each“–“ indicates attachment to another moiety. Accordingly, a biologically active moiety is released from a prodrug as a drug. Accordingly, the phrase“in bound form” is used to refer to the corresponding moiety of a reagent, i.e.“lysine in bound form” refers to a lysine moiety which lacks one or more atom(s) of the lysine reagent and is part of a molecule.
  • sequence or chemical structure of a group of atoms is provided which group of atoms is attached to two moieties or is interrupting a moiety, said sequence or chemical structure can be attached to the two moieties in either orientation, unless explicitly stated otherwise.
  • a moiety“-C(O)N(R)-“ can be attached to two moieties or interrupting a moiety either as“-C(O)N(R)-“ or as“-N(R)C(O)-“.
  • a moiety“-C(O)N(R)-“ can be attached to two moieties or interrupting a moiety either as“-C(O)N(R)-“ or as“-N(R)C(O)-“.
  • a moiety“-C(O)N(R)-“ can be attached to two moieties or interrupting a moiety either as“-C(O)N(R)-“ or as“-N(R)C(O)-“.
  • the term“functional group” means a group of atoms which can react with other groups of atoms.
  • activated functional group means a functional group, which is connected to an activating group, i.e. a functional group was reacted with an activating reagent.
  • Preferred activated functional groups include but are not limited to activated ester groups, activated carbamate groups, activated carbonate groups and activated thiocarbonate groups.
  • Preferred activating groups are selected from formulas (f-i) to (f-vii):
  • b is 1, 2, 3 or 4;
  • X H is Cl, Br, I, or F. Accordingly, a preferred activated ester has the formula
  • X F is selected from formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated carbamate has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated carbamate has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated carbamate has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated carbamate has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f
  • X F is selected from formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated carbonate has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated carbonate has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated carbonate has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated carbonate has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and
  • X F is selected from formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated thioester has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated thioester has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated thioester has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated thioester has the formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv
  • X F is selected from formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii).
  • protecting group means a moiety which is reversibly connected to a functional group to render it incapable of reacting with, for example, another functional group.
  • Suitable alcohol (-OH) protecting groups are, for example, acetyl, benzoyl, benzyl, ⁇ - methoxyethoxymethyl ether, dimethoxytrityl, methoxymethyl ether, methoxytrityl, p- methoxybenzyl ether, methylthiomethyl ether, pivaloyl, tetrahydropyranyl, trityl,
  • Suitable amine protecting groups are, for example, ortho nitrobenzosulfonyl, carbobenzyloxy, p-methoxybenzyl carbonyl, tert-butyloxycarbonyl, 9- fluorenylmethyloxyarbonyl, acetyl, benzoyl, benzyl, carbamate, p-methoxybenzyl, 3,4- dimethoxybenzyl, p-methoxyphenyl, and tosyl.
  • Suitable carbonyl protecting groups are, for example, acetals and ketals, acylals and dithianes.
  • Suitable carboxylic acid protecting groups are, for example, methyl esters, benzyl esters, tert-butyl esters, 2,6-dimethylphenol, 2,6- diisopropylphenol, 2,6.-di-tert-butylphenol, silyl esters, orthoesters, and oxazoline.
  • Suitable phosphate protecting groups are, for example, 2-cyanoethyl and methyl.
  • the invention also comprises their corresponding pharmaceutically or toxicologically acceptable salts, in particular their pharmaceutically utilizable salts.
  • the compounds of the formula (I) or (I’) which contain acidic groups can be used according to the invention, for example, as alkali metal salts, alkaline earth metal salts or as ammonium salts. More precise examples of such salts include sodium salts, potassium salts, calcium salts, magnesium salts or salts with ammonia or organic amines such as, for example, ethylamine, ethanolamine, triethanolamine or amino acids.
  • Compounds of the formula (I) or (I’) which contain one or more basic groups, i.e. groups which can be protonated, can be present and can be used according to the invention in the form of their addition salts with inorganic or organic acids.
  • suitable acids include hydrogen chloride, hydrogen bromide, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, methanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenedisulfonic acids, oxalic acid, acetic acid, tartaric acid, lactic acid, salicylic acid, benzoic acid, formic acid, propionic acid, pivalic acid, diethylacetic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, pimelic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, malic acid, sulfaminic acid, phenylpropionic acid, gluconic acid, ascorbic acid, isonicotinic acid, citric acid, adipic acid, and other acids known
  • the invention also includes, in addition to the salt forms mentioned, inner salts or betaines (zwitterions).
  • the respective salts according to the formula (I) or (I’) can be obtained by customary methods which are known to the person skilled in the art like, for example by contacting these with an organic or inorganic acid or base in a solvent or dispersant, or by anion exchange or cation exchange with other salts.
  • the present invention also includes all salts of the compounds of the formula (I) or (I’) which, owing to low physiological compatibility, are not directly suitable for use in pharmaceuticals but which can be used, for example, as intermediates for chemical reactions or for the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable means approved by a regulatory agency such as the EMEA (Europe) and/or the FDA (US) and/or any other national regulatory agency for use in animals, preferably in humans.
  • the term“small molecule biologically active moiety” refers to an organic biologically active moiety having a molecular weight of less than 1000 Da, such as less than 900 Da or less than 800 Da.
  • oligonucleotide refers to double- or single-stranded RNA and DNA with preferably 2 to 1000 nucleotides and any modifications thereof. Modifications include, but are not limited to, those which provide other chemical groups that incorporate additional charge, polarizability, hydrogen bonding, electrostatic interaction, and fluxionality to the nucleic acid ligand bases or to the nucleic acid ligand as a whole.
  • Such modifications include, but are not limited, to 2’-position sugar modifications, 5-position pyrimidine modifications, 8-position purine modifications, modifications at exocyclic amines, substitution of 4-thiouridines, substitution of 5-bromo or 5-iodo-uracil; backbone modifications, methylations, unusual base-pairing combinations such as the isobases isocytidine and isoguanidine and the like. Modifications can also include 3’ and 5’ modifications such as capping and change of stereochemistry.
  • the term also includes aptamers.
  • the term“peptide nucleic acids” refers to organic polymers having a peptidic backbone, i.e.
  • a backbone in which the monomers are connected to each other through peptide linkages, to which nucleobases, preferably adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine and uracil, are attached.
  • a preferred backbone comprises N-(2-aminoethyl)-glycine.
  • the term“peptide” as used herein refers to a chain of at least 2 and up to and including 50 amino acid monomer moieties linked by peptide (amide) linkages.
  • the term“peptide” also includes peptidomimetics, such as D-peptides, peptoids or beta-peptides, and covers such peptidomimetic chains with up to and including 50 monomer moieties.
  • the term“protein” refers to a chain of more than 50 amino acid monomer moieties linked by peptide linkages, in which preferably no more than 12000 amino acid monomers are linked by peptide linkages, such as no more than 10000 amino acid monomer moieties, no more than 8000 amino acid monomer moieties, no more than 5000 amino acid monomer moieties or no more than 2000 amino acid monomer moieties.
  • the term“polymer” means a molecule comprising repeating structural units, i.e. the monomers, connected by chemical bonds in a linear, circular, branched, crosslinked or dendrimeric way or a combination thereof, which may be of synthetic or biological origin or a combination of both.
  • a polymer may also comprise one or more other chemical group(s) and/or moiety/moieties, such as, for example, one or more functional group(s).
  • a soluble polymer has a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa, e.g. a molecular weight of at least 1 kDa, a molecular weight of at least 2 kDa, a molecular weight of at least 3 kDa or a molecular weight of at least 5 kDa.
  • the polymer is soluble, it preferable has a molecular weight of at most 1000 kDa, such as at most 750 kDa, such as at most 500 kDa, such as at most 300 kDa, such as at most 200 kDa, such as at most 100 kDa. It is understood that for insoluble polymers, such as hydrogels, no meaningful molecular weight ranges can be provided.
  • the term“polymeric” means a reagent or a moiety comprising one or more polymer(s). The person skilled in the art understands that the polymerization products obtained from a polymerization reaction do not all have the same molecular weight, but rather exhibit a molecular weight distribution.
  • the molecular weight ranges, molecular weights, ranges of numbers of monomers in a polymer and numbers of monomers in a polymer as used herein refer to the number average molecular weight and number average of monomers.
  • the term“number average molecular weight” means the ordinary arithmetic means of the molecular weights of the individual polymers.
  • the term“polymerization” or“polymerizing” means the process of reacting monomer or macromonomer reagents in a chemical reaction to form polymer chains or networks, including but not limited to hydrogels.
  • the term“macromonomer” means a molecule that was obtained from the polymerization of monomer reagents.
  • the term“condensation polymerization” or“condensation reaction” means a chemical reaction, in which the functional groups of two reagents react to form one single molecule, i.e. the reaction product, and a low molecular weight molecule, for example water, is released.
  • the term“suspension polymerization” means a heterogeneous and/or biphasic polymerization reaction, wherein the monomer reagents are dissolved in a first solvent, forming the disperse phase which is emulsified in a second solvent, forming the continuous phase.
  • the monomer reagents are the at least one backbone reagent and the at least one crosslinker reagent.
  • Both the first solvent and the monomer reagents are not soluble in the second solvent.
  • Such emulsion is formed by stirring, shaking, exposure to ultrasound or MicrosieveTM emulsification, more preferably by stirring or MicrosieveTM emulsification and more preferably by stirring.
  • This emulsion is stabilized by an appropriate emulsifier.
  • the polymerization is initiated by addition of a base as initiator which is soluble in the first solvent.
  • a suitable commonly known base suitable as initiator may be a tertiary base, such as tetramethylethylenediamine (TMEDA).
  • TEDA tetramethylethylenediamine
  • the term“polyamine” means a reagent or moiety comprising more than one amine (-NH- and/or -NH 2 ), e.g.
  • hydrogel means a hydrophilic or amphiphilic polymeric network composed of homopolymers or copolymers, which is insoluble due to the presence of covalent chemical crosslinks. The crosslinks provide the network structure and physical integrity.
  • the term“PEG-based comprising at least X% PEG” in relation to a moiety or reagent means that said moiety or reagent comprises at least X% (w/w) ethylene glycol units (-CH 2 CH 2 O-), wherein the ethylene glycol units may be arranged blockwise, alternating or may be randomly distributed within the moiety or reagent and preferably all ethylene glycol units of said moiety or reagent are present in one block; the remaining weight percentage of the PEG-based moiety or reagent are other moieties preferably selected from the following moieties and linkages:
  • heterocyclyl 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl;
  • dashed lines indicate attachment to the remainder of the moiety or reagent, and R and R a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl and hexyl.
  • the term“hyaluronic acid-based comprising at least X% hyaluronic acid” is used accordingly.
  • the term“substituted” as used herein means that one or more -H atom(s) of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a different atom or a group of atoms, which are referred to as “substituent”.
  • no more than 6 -H atoms of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a substituent, such as 5 -H atoms of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a substituent, 4 -H atoms of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a substituent, 3 -H atoms of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a substituent, 2 -H atoms of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a substituent or 1 -H atom of a molecule or moiety is replaced by a substituent.
  • the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of
  • -R x1 , -R x1a , -R x1b are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, -T 0 , C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T 0 , C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -R x2 , which are the same or different and wherein C 1-50 alkyl, C 2
  • each -R x3 , -R x3a , -R x4 , -R x4a , -R x4b is independently selected from the group consisting of -H and C 1-6 alkyl; wherein C 1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different. More preferably, the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of
  • each -R x1 , -R x1a , -R x1b , -R x3 , -R x3a is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, halogen, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, and C 2-6 alkynyl; each T 0 is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T 0 is independently optionally substituted with one or more -R x2 , which are the same or different; each -R x2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, -CN, oxo
  • C 1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; each -R x4 , -R x4a , -R x4b is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, halogen, C 1- 6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, and C 2-6 alkynyl; Even more preferably, the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of
  • each -R x1 , -R x1a , -R x1b , -R x2 , -R x3 , -R x3a is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, halogen, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, and C 2-6 alkynyl; each T 0 is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T 0 is independently optionally substituted with one or more -R x2 , which are the same or different.
  • a maximum of 6 -H atoms of an optionally substituted molecule are independently selected from the group consisting of -H, halogen, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl
  • the term“interrupted” means that a moiety is inserted between two carbon atoms or– if the insertion is at one of the moiety’s ends– between a carbon and a hydrogen atom.
  • the term“C 1-4 alkyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched alkyl moiety having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • examples of straight-chain or branched C 1-4 alkyl are methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl and tert-butyl.
  • examples for such C 1-4 alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl and tert-butyl.
  • Each hydrogen of a C 1-4 alkyl carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • a C 1-4 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • the term“C 1-6 alkyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched alkyl moiety having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • examples of straight-chain and branched C 1-6 alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 2-methylbutyl, 2,2- dimethylpropyl, n-hexyl, 2-methylpentyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, 2,3- dimethylbutyl and 3,3-dimethylpropyl.
  • C 1-6 alkyl groups are -CH 2 -, -CH 2 -CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )-, -CH 2 -CH 2 -CH 2 -, -CH(C 2 H 5 )- and -C(CH 3 ) 2 -.
  • Each hydrogen atom of a C 1-6 carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • a C 1-6 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • “C 1-10 alkyl”,“C 1-20 alkyl” or“C 1-50 alkyl” means an alkyl chain having 1 to 10, 1 to 20 or 1 to 50 carbon atoms, respectively, wherein each hydrogen atom of the C 1-10 , C 1-20 or C 1-50 carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • a C 1-10 or C 1-50 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • the term“C 2-6 alkenyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon double bond having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Each hydrogen atom of a C 2-6 alkenyl moiety may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • a C 2-6 alkenyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • C 2-10 alkenyl “C 2-20 alkenyl” or“C 2-50 alkenyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon double bond having 2 to 10, 2 to 20 or 2 to 50 carbon atoms.
  • Each hydrogen atom of a C 2-10 alkenyl, C 2-20 alkenyl or C 2-50 alkenyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • a C 2-10 alkenyl, C 2-20 alkenyl or C 2-50 alkenyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • C 2-6 alkynyl alone or in combination means straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon triple bond having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples are -C ⁇ CH, -CH 2 -C ⁇ CH, CH 2 -CH 2 -C ⁇ CH and CH 2 -C ⁇ C-CH 3 . When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the alkynyl group, then an example is -C ⁇ C-. Each hydrogen atom of a C 2-6 alkynyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, one or more double bond(s) may occur.
  • a C 2-6 alkynyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • the term“C 2-10 alkynyl”,“C 2-20 alkynyl” and“C 2-50 alkynyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon triple bond having 2 to 10, 2 to 20 or 2 to 50 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Each hydrogen atom of a C 2-10 alkynyl, C 2-20 alkynyl or C 2-50 alkynyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
  • one or more double bond(s) may occur.
  • a C 2-10 alkynyl, C 2-20 alkynyl or C 2-50 alkynyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below.
  • a C 1-4 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-10 alkyl, C 1-20 alkyl, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, C 2-20 alkenyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 2-10 alkynyl, C 2-20 alkenyl or C 2-50 alkynyl may optionally be interrupted by one or more of the following moieties:
  • C 3-10 cycloalkyl means a cyclic alkyl chain having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, which may be saturated or unsaturated, e.g. cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl or cyclodecyl.
  • C 3-10 cycloalkyl also includes bridged bicycles like norbornane or norbornene.
  • the term“8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl” or“8- to 30-membered carbopolycycle” means a cyclic moiety of two or more rings with 8 to 30 ring atoms, where two neighboring rings share at least one ring atom and that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or un-saturated).
  • a 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl means a cyclic moiety of two, three, four or five rings, more preferably of two, three or four rings.
  • 3- to 10-membered heterocycles include but are not limited to aziridine, oxirane, thiirane, azirine, oxirene, thiirene, azetidine, oxetane, thietane, furan, thiophene, pyrrole, pyrroline, imidazole, imidazoline, pyrazole, pyrazoline, oxazole, oxazoline, isoxazole, isoxazoline, thiazole, thiazoline, isothiazole, isothiazoline, thiadiazole, thiadiazoline, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, pyrrolidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, oxazolidine, isoxazolidine, thiazolidine, isothiazolidine, thiadiazolidine, sulfolane, pyran, dihydropyran, tetra
  • Each hydrogen atom of a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or 3- to 10-membered heterocyclic group may be replaced by a substituent as defined below.
  • Examples for an 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle are indole, indoline, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzisoxazole, benzothiazole, benzisothiazole, benzimidazole, benzimidazoline, quinoline, quinazoline, dihydroquinazoline, quinoline, dihydroquinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, decahydroquinoline, isoquinoline, decahydroisoquinoline,
  • 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle also includes spiro structures of two rings like 1,4-dioxa-8- azaspiro[4.5]decane or bridged heterocycles like 8-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octane.
  • Each hydrogen atom of an 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl or 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle carbon may be replaced by a substituent as defined below.
  • phrase“the pair ⁇ R 1 / ⁇ R 1a is joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or a 8- to 11- membered heterobicyclyl” refers to a moiety having the following structure:
  • ⁇ R is the C 3-10 cycloalkyl or a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl. This applies analogously to the pairs ⁇ R 2 / ⁇ R 3 , ⁇ R 5 / ⁇ R 5a and ⁇ R 4 / ⁇ R 4a . It is understood that the phrase“the pair ⁇ R 1 / ⁇ R 5 is joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring A” refers to a moiety having the following structure:
  • halogen means fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo. It is generally preferred that halogen is fluoro or chloro.
  • the term“comprise” or“comprising” also encompasses“consist of” or“consisting of”.
  • ⁇ D of formula (I) is a primary or secondary amine-comprising biologically active moiety which is connected to -L 1 through an amide linkage, i.e. ⁇ X 1 ⁇ is ⁇ CR 5 R 5a ⁇ .
  • ⁇ D of formula (I) is preferably selected from the group consisting of small molecule biologically active moiety, oligonucleotide moiety, peptide nucleic acid moiety, peptide moiety and protein moiety. More preferably -D of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of small molecule biologically active moiety, peptide moiety and protein moiety. In one preferred embodiment -D of formula (I) is a small molecule biologically active moiety. In another preferred embodiment -D of formula (I) is a peptide moiety. In another preferred embodiment -D of formula (I) is a protein moiety. In one preferred embodiment such protein moiety is a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody or fragment or fusion thereof.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a prodrug reagent comprising a conjugate L’-Q, wherein -Q is -OH or a leaving group; and -L’ comprises, preferably consists of, a linker moiety -L 1 represented by formula (I’)
  • -X 1 is selected from the group consisting of -CR 5 R 5a -, -O-, -NR 5 - and -S-; -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a are independently of other selected from -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl, C 1-6 alkynyl; wherein C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl, C 1-6 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -R 6 , which are the same or different; and wherein C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl, C 1-6 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-,
  • each T is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered
  • one or more of the pairs -R 1 /-R 1a , -R 2 /-R 3 , -R 5 /-R 5a and -R 4 /-R 4a are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10- membered heterocyclyl or a 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl;
  • pairs -R 1 /-R 2 , -R 1 /-R 3 , -R 1 /-R 5 , -R 1 /-R 5a , -R 1a /-R 2 , -R 1a /-R 3 , -R 1a /-R 5 , -R 1a /-R 5a , -R 2 /-R 5 , -R 2 /-R 5a , -R 3 /-R 5 , -R 3 /-R 5a are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring -A-;
  • A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl; naphthyl; indenyl; indanyl;
  • tetralinyl C 3-10 cycloalkyl; 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl; and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein -L 1 is substituted with one to five moieties -L 2 -Z and/or -L 2’ -Y, preferably -L 1 is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y, and is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (I’) is not replaced by a substituent; wherein -L 2 - and -L 2’ - are independently of each other a single chemical bond or a spacer moiety; -Z is a carrier moiety; and -Y is a functional group which may optionally be present in its protected form.
  • -Q of formula (I’) is selected from the group consisting of chloride, bromide, fluoride, nitrophenoxy, imidazolyl, N-hydroxysuccinimidyl, N-hydroxybenzotriazolyl, N- hydroxyazobenzotriazolyl, pentafluorphenoxy, N-hydroxysulfosuccinimidyl,
  • diphenylphosphinomethanethiyl 2-diphenylphosphinophenoxy, norbornene-N- hydroxysuccinimidyl, N-hydroxyphthalimide, pyridinoxy, nonafluoro tert-butyloxy and hexafluoro isopropyloxy.
  • -Y of formula (I’) is selected from the group consisting of thiol, maleimide, amine, hydroxyl, carboxylic acid and derivatives, carbonate and derivatives, carbamate and derivatives, isothiocyanate, disulfide, pyridyl disulfide, methylthiosulfonyl, vinylsulfone, aldehyde, ketone, haloacetyl, selenide, azide, -NH-NH 2 , -O-NH 2 , a terminal alkyne, a compound of formula (z’i)
  • -Y 1 -, -Y 2 - are independently of each other -C- or -N-,
  • -R a , -R a ’, -R a1 , -R a1’ are independently of each other -H or C 1-6 alkyl
  • ax1 is 0, if -Y 2 - is -N-; ax1 is 1, if -Y 2 - is -C-, optionally the pair -R a /-R a1 forms a chemical bond, if -Y 2 - is -C-, optionally, the pair -R a’ /-R a1’ are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a ring A’, if -Y 2 - is -C-, A’ is cyclopropyl or phenyl; a compound of formula (z’ii)
  • ⁇ R a2' and ⁇ R a3' are–H or are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 5-membered heterocyclyl ring A 1' , and indicates a single or double bond; a compound of formula (z’v)
  • -R a4 , -R a4’ , -R a5 , -R a5’ are -H, optionally the pair -R a4 /-R a5 forms a chemical bond, optionally, the pair -R a4’ /-R a5’ are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring A 2 ’, A 2 ’ is 5-membered heterocyclyl; a compound of formula (z’vi)
  • -R a6 , -R a6’ are either both C 1-6 alkyl or one of -R a6 , -R a6’ is -H and the other one is selected from C a7’
  • -R a7 , -R a7’ , -R a7’’ are independently of each other -H or C 1-4 alkyl; a compound of formula (z’vii)
  • -R a8 , -R a8‘ , -R a8‘‘ are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H and C 1-4 alkyl; a compound of formula (z’ix)
  • -R a9 is selected from–COOR a11 , -CONHR a11 , and ,
  • -Y 4 - is -C- or–N-
  • -R a12 is selected from the group consisting of
  • -R a13 , -R a13’ are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H and C 1-4 alkyl,
  • -A a3 is selected from -H, methyl, tert-butyl, -CF 3 , -COOR,
  • each -Y 5 -, -Y 6 -, -Y 7 -, -Y 8 - is independently of each other -C- or -N-, provided that no more than 3 of -Y 5 -, -Y 6 -, -Y 7 -, -Y 8 - are -N-,
  • each of -Y 9 -, -Y 10 -, -Y 11 -, -Y 12 -, -Y 13 - is either -C-, -N-, -S- or -O-, provided that no more than 4 of -Y 9 -, -Y 10 -, -Y 11 -, -Y 12 -, -Y 13 - are -N-, -S-, or -O-; a compound of formula (z’xi)
  • -R a19 , -R a18’ are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z’xiii)
  • -R a20 is selected from the group consisting of -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z’xiv)
  • Ar is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl,
  • -Y 14 is selected from halogen, -R a22 , -R a23 , -R a23’ are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z’xv)
  • Ar is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl,
  • -R a24 , -R a24’ , -R a24’’ , -R a24’’ , -R a24’’ are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10- membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z’xvi)
  • -R a25 is selected from the group consisting of -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, C 3-8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z’xvii)
  • -R a27 , -R a27’ are independently of each other -H or C 1-6 alkyl; a compound of formula (z’xviii)
  • -PPh 2 represents a group having the following formula
  • q 1 or 2
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to -L 2’ -; wherein the moieties of formula (z’i), (z’ii), (z’iii), (z’iv), (z’v), (z’vi), (z’vii), (z’viii), (z’ix), (z’x), (z’xi), (z’xii), (z’xiii), (z’xiv), (z’xv), (z’xvi), (z’xvii) and (z’xviii) are substituted with a moiety -L 2’ - and are optionally further substituted.
  • -Y 1 - of formula (z’i) is -C-.
  • -R a , -R a’ , -R a1 , -R a1’ of formula (z’i) are -H.
  • Preferred embodiments of formula (z’i) are selected from the group consisting of
  • -R a19 is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl.
  • a preferred embodiment of formula (z’xiii) is ,
  • Ar is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl, and -Y 14 is halogen.
  • a preferred embodiment of formula (z’xv) is ,
  • Ar is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl;
  • -R a24’ , -R a24’’ , -R a24’’ are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl.
  • a preferred embodiment of formula (z’xvi) is ,
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to -L 2’ -.
  • -X 1 - of formula (I) or (I’) is -CR 5 R 5a -.
  • -R 4a of formula (I) or (I’) is -H which is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a are independently of other selected from -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl, C 1-6 alkynyl.
  • -R 1 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl and C 1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R 1 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C 1-6 alkyl.
  • -R 1 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl.
  • -R 1a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl and C 1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R 1a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C 1-6 alkyl.
  • -R 1a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl.
  • -R 2 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl and C 1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R 2 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C 1-6 alkyl.
  • -R 2 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl.
  • -R 3 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl and C 1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R 3 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C 1-6 alkyl.
  • -R 3 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl.
  • -R 4 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl and C 1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R 4 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C 1-6 alkyl.
  • -R 4 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl.
  • -R 5 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl and C 1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R 5 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C 1-6 alkyl.
  • -R 5 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl.
  • -R 5a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkenyl and C 1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R 5a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C 1-6 alkyl.
  • -R 5a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl.
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to the primary or secondary amine of the biologically active moiety
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a are used as defined in formula (I).
  • -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are both -H.
  • -R 1 and -R 1a of formula (Ia) are both -H.
  • -R 2 of formula (Ia) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 3 of formula (Ia) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 of formula (Ia) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ia) are both -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are -H.
  • -R 1 , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R 1a is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are -H and–R 2 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R 3 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R 4 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are -H and–R 5 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 3 , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R 2 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are -H and–R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • a preferred moiety -L 1 of formula (I’) is of formula (I’a):
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a are used as defined in formula (I’).
  • -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are both -H.
  • -R 1 and -R 1a of formula (I’a) are both -H.
  • -R 2 of formula (I’a) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 3 of formula (I’a) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 of formula (I’a) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ia) are both -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are -H.
  • -R 1 , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R 1a is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are -H and–R 2 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R 3 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R 4 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are -H and–R 5 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 3 , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R 2 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are -H and–R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 5 and -R 5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • Another preferred moiety -L 1 of formula (I) is of formula (Ib):
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to the primary or secondary amine of the biologically active moiety
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are used as defined in formula (I).
  • -R 1 and -R 1a of formula (Ib) are both -H.
  • -R 2 of formula (Ib) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 3 of formula (Ib) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 of formula (Ib) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ib) are both -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ib) are -H. In one embodiment -R 1 , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ib) are -H and -R 1a is -CH 3 . In one embodiment -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ib) are -H and -R 2 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ib) are -H and -R 3 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 and -R 4a of formula (Ib) are -H and -R 4 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 and -R 3 of formula (Ib) are -H and -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a and -R 3 of formula (Ib) are -H and -R 2 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a and -R 2 of formula (Ib) are -H and -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 and -R 1a of formula (Ib) are -H and -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • a preferred moiety -L 1 of formula (I’) is of formula (I’b):
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are used as defined in formula (I’).
  • -R 1 and -R 1a of formula (I’b) are both -H.
  • -R 2 of formula (I’b) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 3 of formula (I’b) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 of formula (I’b) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (I’b) are both -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (I’b) are -H.
  • -R 1 , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (I’b) are -H and -R 1a is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (I’b) are -H and -R 2 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (I’b) are -H and -R 3 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 and -R 4a of formula (I’b) are -H and -R 4 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 and -R 3 of formula (I’b) are -H and -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a and -R 3 of formula (I’b) are -H and -R 2 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a and -R 2 of formula (I’b) are -H and -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 and -R 1a of formula (I’b) are -H and -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • Another preferred moiety -L 1 of formula (I) is of formula (Ic):
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to the primary or secondary amine of the biologically active moiety
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are used as defined in formula (I).
  • -R 1 and -R 1a of formula (Ic) are both -H.
  • -R 2 of formula (Ic) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 3 of formula (Ic) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 of formula (Ic) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ic) are both -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ic) are -H. In one embodiment -R 1 , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ic) are -H and -R 1a is -CH 3 . In one embodiment -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ic) are -H and -R 2 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (Ic) are -H and -R 3 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 and -R 4a of formula (Ic) are -H and -R 4 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 and -R 3 of formula (Ic) are -H and -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a and -R 3 of formula (Ic) are -H and -R 2 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a and -R 2 of formula (Ic) are -H and -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 and -R 1a of formula (Ic) are -H and -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • a preferred moiety -L 1 of formula (I’) is of formula (I’c):
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are used as defined in formula (I’).
  • -R 1 and -R 1a of formula (I’c) are both -H.
  • -R 2 of formula (I’c) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 3 of formula (I’c) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 of formula (I’c) is -CH 3 .
  • -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (I’c) are both -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (I’c) are -H.
  • -R 1 , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (I’c) are -H and -R 1a is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (I’c) are -H and -R 2 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 4 and -R 4a of formula (I’c) are -H and -R 3 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 and -R 4a of formula (I’c) are -H and -R 4 is -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 and -R 3 of formula (I’c) are -H and -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a and -R 3 of formula (I’c) are -H and -R 2 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 , -R 1a and -R 2 of formula (I’c) are -H and -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -R 1 and -R 1a of formula (I’c) are -H and -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 and -R 4a are -CH 3 .
  • -Z is a carrier.
  • -Z comprises a C 8-18 alkyl group or a polymer with a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa.
  • -Z comprises a C 8-18 alkyl group.
  • -Z comprises a polymer with a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa.
  • a polymeric carrier -Z comprises at least one of the polymers selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides),
  • poly(amide) is a peptide or protein.
  • -Z comprises a protein. Even more preferably, -Z comprises a protein selected from the group consisting of albumin, transferrin, and immunoglobulin. In another preferred embodiment -Z comprises a protein carrier as disclosed in
  • -Z comprises a PEG-based polymer comprising at last 10% PEG, such as at least 20 % PEG, at least 30 % PEG, at least 40 % PEG or at least 50% PEG; or a hyaluronic acid-based polymer comprising at least 10 % hyaluronic acid, such as at least 20 % hyaluronic acid, at least 30% hyaluronic acid, at least 40 % hyaluronic acid or at least 50 % hyaluronic acid.
  • -Z comprises a water-soluble polymer with a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa.
  • -Z comprises a linear, branched or dendritic PEG-based polymer comprising at least 10 % PEG (such as at least 20 % PEG, at least 30% PEG, at least 40 % PEG or at least 50 % PEG) with a molecular weight from 2,000 Da to 150,000 Da.
  • PEG-based carrier as disclosed in WO2103/024047 A1 and WO2013/024047 A1, which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • a preferred water-soluble PEG-based carrier -Z is a multi-arm PEG derivative as, for instance, detailed in the products list of JenKem Technology (USA), such as a 4-arm-PEG derivative, in particular a 4-arm-PEG comprising a pentaerythritol core, an 8-arm-PEG derivative comprising a hexaglycerin core, and an 8-arm-PEG derivative comprising a tripentaerythritol core. More preferably, such water-soluble PEG-based carrier -Z comprises a moiety selected from: a 4-arm PEG Amine comprising a pentaerythritol core: 4
  • an 8-arm PEG Amine comprising a hexaglycerin core: 8
  • n ranging from 20 to 500
  • -R hexaglycerin or tripentaerythritol core structure
  • a 6-arm PEG Amine comprising a sorbitol or dipentaerythritol core: 6 with n ranging from 20 to 500;
  • -Z comprises a water-insoluble polymer.
  • -Z comprises a water-insoluble hydrogel, more preferably a PEG-based hydrogel comprising at least 10 % PEG (such as at least 20 % PEG, at least 30% PEG, at least 40 % PEG or at least 50 % PEG) or a hyaluronic acid-based hydrogel comprising at least 10 % hyaluronic acid (such as at least 20 % hyaluronic acid, at least 30% hyaluronic acid, at least 40 % hyaluronic acid or at least 50 % hyaluronic acid) and most preferably -Z comprises a hydrogel as disclosed in WO2006/003014 A2, WO2011/012715 A1 or WO2014/056926 A1, which are
  • b is 1, 2, 3 or 4,
  • X H is Cl, Br, I, or F); (a-ii) at least one crosslinker reagent, wherein the at least one crosslinker reagent has a molecular weight ranging from 0.2 to 40 kDa and comprises at least two functional end groups selected from the group consisting of activated ester groups, activated carbamate groups, activated carbonate groups, activated thiocarbonate groups, amine groups and thiol groups; in a weight ratio of the at least one backbone reagent to the at least one crosslinker reagent ranging from 1:99 to 99:1 and wherein the molar ratio of A x0 to functional end groups is >1; (b) polymerizing the mixture of step (a) in a suspension polymerization to a hydrogel.
  • the at least one crosslinker reagent has a molecular weight ranging from 0.2 to 40 kDa and comprises at least two functional end groups selected from the group consisting of activated ester groups, activated carbamate groups, activate
  • the crosslinker reagent of step (a-ii) comprises at least one reversible linkage. Even more preferably, such at least one reversible linkage is an ester and/or carbonate.
  • the mixture of step (a) comprises a first solvent and at least a second solvent.
  • Said first solvent is preferably selected from the group comprising dichloromethane, chloroform, tetrahydrofuran, ethyl acetate, dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, propylene carbonate, N-methylpyrrolidone, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol and water and mixtures thereof.
  • the at least one backbone reagent and at least one crosslinker reagent are dissolved in the first solvent, i.e. the disperse phase of the suspension polymerization.
  • the backbone reagent and the crosslinker reagent are dissolved separately, i.e. in different containers, using either the same or different solvent and preferably using the same solvent for both reagents.
  • the backbone reagent and the crosslinker reagent are dissolved together, i.e. in the same container and using the same solvent.
  • a suitable solvent for the backbone reagent is an organic solvent.
  • the solvent is selected from the group consisting of dichloromethane, chloroform, tetrahydrofuran, ethyl acetate, dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, propylene carbonate, N- methylpyrrolidone, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol and water and mixtures thereof.
  • the backbone reagent is dissolved in a solvent selected from the group comprising acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, methanol or mixtures thereof. Most preferably, the backbone reagent is dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide.
  • the backbone reagent is dissolved in the solvent in a concentration ranging from 1 to 300 mg/ml, more preferably from 5 to 60 mg/ml and most preferably from 10 to 40 mg/ml.
  • a suitable solvent for the crosslinker reagent is an organic solvent.
  • the solvent is selected from the group comprising dichloromethane, chloroform, tetrahydrofuran, ethyl acetate, dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, propylene carbonate, N- methylpyrrolidone, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, water or mixtures thereof.
  • the crosslinker reagent is dissolved in a solvent selected from the group comprising dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, methanol or mixtures thereof. Most preferably, the crosslinker reagent is dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide. In one embodiment the crosslinker reagent is dissolved in the solvent in a concentration ranging from 5 to 500 mg/ml, more preferably from 25 to 300 mg/ml and most preferably from 50 to 200 mg/ml.
  • the at least one backbone reagent and the at least one crosslinker reagent are mixed in a weight ratio ranging from 1:99 to 99:1, e.g.
  • the ratios are selected such that the mixture of step (a) comprises a molar excess of funcational groups A x0 from the backbone reagent compared to the activated functional end groups of the crosslinker reagent.
  • the at least one second solvent i.e. the continuous phase of the suspension polymerization, is preferably an organic solvent, more preferably an organic solvent selected from the group comprising linear, branched or cyclic C 5-30 alkanes; linear, branched or cyclic C 5-30 alkenes; linear, branched or cyclic C 5-30 alkynes; linear or cyclic poly(dimethylsiloxanes); aromatic C 6-20 hydrocarbons; and mixtures thereof.
  • the at least second solvent is selected from the group comprising linear, branched or cyclic C 5-16 alkanes; toluene; xylene; mesitylene; hexamethyldisiloxane; or mixtures thereof.
  • the at least second solvent selected from the group comprising linear C 7-11 alkanes, such as heptane, octane, nonane, decane and undecane.
  • the mixture of step (a) further comprises a detergent.
  • Preferred detergents are Cithrol DPHS, Hypermer 70A, Hypermer B246, Hypermer 1599A, Hypermer 2296, and Hypermer 1083.
  • the detergent has a concentration of 0.1 g to 100 g per 1 L total mixture, i.e. disperse phase and continuous phase together. More preferably, the detergent has a concentration of 0.5 g to 10 g per 1 L total mixture, and most preferably, the detergent has a concentration of 0.5 g to 5 g per 1 L total mixture.
  • the mixture of step (a) is an emulsion.
  • the polymerization in step (b) is initiated by adding a base.
  • the base is a non- nucleophilic base soluble in alkanes, more preferably the base is selected from N,N,N',N'- tetramethylethylene diamine (TMEDA), 1,4-dimethylpiperazine, 4-methylmorpholine, 4- ethylmorpholine, 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, 1,1,4,7,10,10- hexamethyltriethylenetetramine, 1,4,7-trimethyl-1,4,7-triazacyclononane, tris[2- (dimethylamino)ethyl]amine, triethylamine, DIPEA, trimethylamine, N,N- dimethylethylamine, N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyl-1,6-hexanediamine, N,N,N′,N′′,N′′- pentamethyldiethylenetriamine, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene, 1,5
  • the base is selected from TMEDA, 1,4-dimethylpiperazine, 4-methylmorpholine, 4-ethylmorpholine, 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, 1,1,4,7,10,10-hexamethyltriethylenetetramine, 1,4,7-trimethyl- 1,4,7-triazacyclononane, tris[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]amine, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7- ene, 1,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene, and hexamethylenetetramine.
  • the base is TMEDA.
  • the base is added to the mixture of step (a) in an amount of 1 to 500 equivalents per activated functional end group in the mixture, preferably in an amount of 5 to 50 equivalents, more preferably in an amount of 5 to 25 equivalents and most preferably in an amount of 10 equivalents.
  • the polymerization of the hydrogel is a condensation reaction, which preferably occurs under continuous stirring of the mixture of step (a).
  • the polymerization reaction is carried out in a cylindrical vessel equipped with baffles.
  • the diameter to height ratio of the vessel may range from 4:1 to 1:2, more preferably the diameter to height ratio of the vessel ranges from 2:1 to 1:1.
  • the reaction vessel is equipped with an axial flow stirrer selected from the group comprising pitched blade stirrer, marine type propeller, or Lightnin A-310. More preferably, the stirrer is a pitched blade stirrer.
  • Step (b) can be performed in a broad temperature range, preferably at a temperature from -10°C to 100 C°, more preferably at a temperature of 0°C to 80°C, even more preferably at a temperature of 10°C to 50 °C and most preferably at ambient temperature.
  • “Ambient temperature” refers to the temperature present in a typical laboratory environment and preferably means a temperature ranging from 17 to 25°C.
  • the hydrogel obtained from the polymerization is a shaped article, such as a coating, mesh, stent, nanoparticle or a microparticle.
  • the hydrogel is in the form of microparticular beads having a diameter from 1 to 500 micrometer, more preferably with a diameter from 10 to 300 micrometer, even more preferably with a diameter from 20 and 150 micrometer and most preferably with a diameter from 30 to 130 micrometer.
  • the afore-mentioned diameters are measured when the hydrogel microparticles are fully hydrated in water.
  • the process for the preparation of a hydrogel further comprises the step of:
  • Step (c) working-up the hydrogel comprises one or more of the following step(s):
  • step (c) comprises all of the following steps
  • the at least one backbone reagent has a molecular weight ranging from 1 to 100 kDa, preferably from 2 to 50 kDa, more preferably from 5 and 30 kDa, even more preferably from 5 to 25 kDa and most preferably from 5 to 15 kDa.
  • the backbone reagent is PEG-based comprising at least 10% PEG, more preferably comprising at least 20% PEG, even more preferably comprising at least 30% PEG and most preferably comprising at least 40% PEG.
  • the backbone reagent of step (a-i) is present in the form of its acidic salt, preferably in the form of an acid addition salt.
  • Suitable acid addition salts are formed from acids which form non-toxic salts. Examples include but are not limited to the acetate, aspartate, benzoate, besylate, bicarbonate, carbonate, bisulphate, sulphate, borate, camsylate, citrate, edisylate, esylate, formate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glucuronate,
  • the backbone reagent is present in the form of its hydrochloride salt.
  • the at least one backbone reagent is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (aI) B(– (A 0 ) x1 – (SP) x2 – A 1 – P– A 2 – Hyp 1 ) x (aI), wherein
  • SP is a spacer moiety selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl and C 2-6 alkynyl,
  • P is a PEG-based polymeric chain comprising at least 80% PEG, preferably at least 85% PEG, more preferably at least 90% PEG and most preferably at least 95% PEG,
  • Hyp 1 is a moiety comprising an amine (-NH 2 and/or -NH-) or a polyamine
  • x is an integer from 3 to 16
  • x1, x2 are independently of each other 0 or 1, provided that x1 is 0, if x2 is 0, A 0 , A 1 , A 2 are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of
  • R 1 and R 1a are independently of each other selected from H and C 1-6 alkyl; a compound of formula (aII) Hyp 2 – A 3 – P– A 4 – Hyp 3 (aII), wherein
  • Hyp 2 , Hyp 3 are independently of each other a polyamine comprising at least two amines (-NH 2 and/or -NH-), and
  • a 3 and A 4 are independently selected from the group consisting of
  • R 1 and R 1a are independently of each other selected from H and C 1-6 alkyl; a compound of formula (aIII) P 1 – A 5 – Hyp 4 (aIII), wherein
  • P 1 is a PEG-based polymeric chain comprising at least 80% PEG
  • Hyp 4 is a polyamine comprising at least three amines (-NH 2 and/or -NH), and
  • a 5 is selected from the group consisting of
  • R 1 and R 1a are independently of each other selected from H and C 1-6 alkyl; and a compound of formula (aIV),
  • Hyp 5 is a polyamine comprising at least three amines (-NH 2 and/or -NH), and A 6 is selected from the group consisting of
  • R 1 and R 1a are independently of each other selected from H and C 1- 6 alkyl
  • T 1 is selected from the group consisting of C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl and C 2-50 alkynyl, which fragment is optionally interrupted by one or more group(s) selected from -NH-, -N(C 1-4 alkyl)-, -O-, -S-, -C(O)-, -C(O)NH- , -C(O)N(C 1-4 alkyl)-, -O-C(O)-, -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, phenyl and naphthyl.
  • the term“Hyp x ” refers to Hyp 1 , Hyp 2 , Hyp 3 , Hyp 4 and Hyp 5 collectively.
  • the backbone reagent is a compound of formula (aI), (aII) or (aIII), more preferably the backbone reagent is a compound of formula (aI) or (aIII), and most preferably the backbone reagent is a compound of formula (aI).
  • x is 4, 6 or 8.
  • x is 4 or 8, most preferably, x is 4.
  • a 0 , A 1 , A 2 , A 3 , A 4 , A 5 and A 6 are selected from the group comprising .
  • a 0 is
  • a 2 is
  • a 6 is .
  • T 1 is selected from H and C 1-6 alkyl.
  • the branching core B is selected from the following structures:
  • dashed lines indicate attachment to A 0 or, if x1 and x2 are both 0, to A 1 ,
  • t is 1 or 2; preferably t is 1,
  • v is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ,6 ,7 ,8 , 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14; preferably, v is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6;
  • B has a structure of formula (a-i), (a-ii), (a-iii), (a-iv), (a-v), (a- vi), (a-vii), (a-viii), (a-ix), (a-x), (a-xiv), (a-xv) or (a-xvi). More preferably, B has a structure of formula (a-iii), (a-iv), (a-v), (a-vi), (a-vii), (a-viii), (a-ix), (a-x) or (a-iv). Most preferably, B has a structure of formula (a-xiv).
  • a preferred embodiment is a combination of B and A 0 , or, if x1 and x2 are both 0 a preferred combination of B and A 1 , which is selected from the following structures:
  • dashed lines indicate attachment to SP or, if x1 and x2 are both 0, to P. More preferably, the combination of B and A 0 or, if x1 and x2 are both 0, the combination of B and A 1 , has a structure of formula of formula (b-i), (b-iv), (b-vi) or (b-viii) and most preferably has a structure of formula of formula (b-i). In one embodiment, x1 and x2 of formula (aI) are 0. In one embodiment, the PEG-based polymeric chain P has a molecular weight from 0.3 kDa to 40 kDa; e.g.
  • P has a molecular weight from 1 to 10 kDa.
  • the PEG-based polymeric chain P 1 has a molecular weight from 0.3 kDa to 40 kDa; e.g. from 0.4 to 35 kDa, from 0.6 to 38 kDA, from 0.8 to 30 kDa, from 1 to 25 kDa, from 1 to 15 kDa or from 1 to 10 kDa.
  • P 1 has a molecular weight from 1 to 10 kDa.
  • P has the structure of formula (c-i):
  • n ranges from 6 to 900, more preferably n ranges from 20 to 700 and most preferably n ranges from 20 to 250.
  • P 1 has the structure of formula (c- ii): (c-ii),
  • n ranges from 6 to 900, more preferably n ranges from 20 to 700 and most preferably n ranges from 20 to 250;
  • T 0 is selected from the group comprising C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl and C 2-6 alkynyl, which is optionally interrupted by one or more group(s) selected from -NH-, -N(C 1-4 alkyl)-, -O-, -S-, -C(O)-, -C(O)NH-, -C(O)N(C 1-4 alkyl)-, -O-C(O)-, -S(O)- and -S(O) 2 -.
  • the moiety Hyp x is a polyamine and preferably comprises in bound form and, where applicable, in R- and/or S- configuration a moiety of the formulas (d-i), (d-ii), (d-iii) and/or (d-vi):
  • Hyp x comprises in bound form and in R- and/or S-configuration lysine, ornithine, diaminoproprionic acid and/or diaminobutyric acid. Most preferably, Hyp x comprises in bound form and in R- and/or S-configuration lysine.
  • Hyp x has a molecular weight from 40 Da to 30 kDa, preferably from 0.3 kDa to 25 kDa, more preferably from 0.5 kDa to 20 kDa, even more preferably from 1 kDa to 20 kDa and most preferably from 2 kDa to 15 kDa.
  • Hyp x is preferably selected from the group consisting of - a moiety of formula (e-i)
  • p1 is an integer from 1 to 5, preferably p1 is 4, and
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to A 2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI) and to A 3 or A 4 if the backbone reagent has the structure of formula (aII); - a moiety of formula (e-ii)
  • p2, p3 and p4 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 1 to 5, preferably p2, p3 and p4 are 4, and
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to A 2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A 3 or A 4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A 5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A 6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); - a moiety of formula (e-iii)
  • p5 to p11 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 1 to 5, preferably p5 to p11 are 4, and
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to A 2 if the backbone reagent is of formula (aI), to A 3 or A 4 if the backbone reagent is of formula (aII), to A 5 if the backbone reagent is of formula (aIII) and to A 6 if the backbone reagent is of formula (aIV); - a moiety of formula (e-iv)
  • p12 to p26 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 1 to 5, preferably p12 to p26 are 4, and the dashed line indicates attachment to A 2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A 3 or A 4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A 5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A 6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); -
  • p27 and p28 are identical or different and each is independently of the other an integer from 1 to 5, preferably p27 and p28 are 4,
  • q is an integer from 1 to 8, preferably q is 2 or 6 and most preferably 1 is
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to A 2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A 3 or A 4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A 5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A 6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); - a moiety of formula (e-vi)
  • p29 and p30 are identical or different and each is independently of the other an
  • p31 to p36 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 2 to 5, preferably p31 to p36 are 3, and
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to A 2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A 3 or A 4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A 5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A 6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); - a moiety of formula (e-viii)
  • p37 to p50 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 2 to 5, preferably p37 to p50 are 3, and
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to A 2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A 3 or A 4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A 5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A 6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); and - a moiety of formula (e-ix):
  • p51 to p80 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 2 to 5, preferably p51 to p80 are 3, and
  • the dashed line indicates attachment to A 2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A 3 or A 4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A 5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A 6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); and wherein the moieties (e-i) to (e-v) may at each chiral center be in either R- or S- configuration, preferably, all chiral centers of a moiety (e-i) to (e-v) are in the same configuration.
  • Hyp x is has a structure of formulas (e-i), (e-ii), (e-iii), (e-iv), (e-vi), (e-vii), (e-viii) or (e-ix). More preferably, Hyp x has a structure of formulas (e-ii), (e-iii), (e-iv), (e-vii), (e- viii) or (e-ix), even more preferably Hyp x has a structure of formulas (e-ii), (e-iii), (e-vii) or (e-viii) and most preferably Hyp x has the structure of formula (e-iii). If the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), a preferred moiety -A 2 -Hyp 1 is a moiety of the formula (aI).
  • E 1 is selected from formulas (e-i) to (e-ix). If the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII) a preferred moiety Hyp 2 -A 3 - is a moiety of the formula
  • E 1 is selected from formulas (e-i) to (e-ix); and a preferred moiety -A 4 -Hyp 3 is a moiety of the formula ,
  • E 1 is selected from formulas (e-i) to (e-ix). If the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII), a preferred moiety -A 5 -Hyp 4 is a moiety of the formula ,
  • E 1 is selected from formulas (e-i) to (e-ix). More preferably, the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI) and B has a structure of formula (a-xiv). Even more preferably, the backbone reagent has the structure of formula (aI), B has the structure of formula (a-xiv), x1 and x2 are 0, and A 1 is -O-. Even more preferably, the backbone reagent has the structure of formula (aI), B has the structure of formula (a-xiv), A 1 is -O-, and P has a structure of formula (c-i).
  • the backbone reagent has the following formula:
  • n ranges from 10 to 40, preferably from 10 to 30, more preferably from 20 to 30 and most preferably n is 28.
  • SP is a spacer moiety selected from the group comprising C 1-6 alkyl, C 2-6 alkenyl and C 2-6 alkynyl, preferably SP is -CH 2 -, -CH 2 -CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )-, -CH 2 -CH 2 -CH 2 -,
  • the at least one crosslinker reagent comprises at least two activated functional end groups which during the polymerization of step (b) react with the functional groups A x0 of the at least one backbone reagent.
  • the crosslinker reagent has a molecular weight ranging from 0.5 to 40 kDa, more preferably ranging from 0.75 to 30 kDa, even more preferably ranging from 1 to 20 kDa, even more preferably ranging from 1 to 10 kDa, even more preferably ranging from 1 to 7.5 kDa and most preferably ranging from 2 kDa to 4 kDa.
  • the crosslinker reagent comprises at least two activated functional end groups selected from the group comprising activated ester groups, activated carbamate groups, activated carbonate groups and activated thiocarbonate groups, which during polymerization react with the amine groups of the backbone reagents, forming amide linkages.
  • the crosslinker reagent is a compound of formula (V-I):
  • each D 1 , D 2 , D 3 and D 4 are identical or different and each is independently of the others selected from the group comprising -O-, -NR 5 -, -S- and -CR 6 R 6a -;
  • each R 1 , R 1a , R 2 , R 2a , R 3 , R 3a , R 4 , R 4a , R 6 and R 6a are identical or different and each is independently of the others selected from the group comprising -H, -OR 7 , - NR 7 R 7a , -SR 7 and C 1-6 alkyl; optionally, each of the pair(s) R 1 /R 2 , R 3 /R 4 , R 1a /R 2a , and R 3a /R 4a may independently form a chemical bond and/or each of the pairs R 1 /R 1a , R 2 /R 2a , R 3 /R 3a , R 4 /R 4a , R 6 /R 6a , R 1 /R 2 , R 3 /R 4 , R 1a /R 2a , and R 3a /R 4a are independently of each other joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a C 3
  • each R 5 is independently selected from -H and C 1-6 alkyl; optionally, each of the pair(s) R 1 /R 5 , R 2 /R 5 , R 3 /R 5 , R 4 /R 5 and R 5 /R 6 may independently form a chemical bond and/or are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl;
  • each R 7 , R 7a is independently selected from H and C 1-6 alkyl
  • A is selected from the group consisting of indenyl, indanyl and tetralinyl;
  • m ranges from 120 to 920, preferably from 120 to 460 and more preferably from 120 to 230;
  • r1, r2, r7, r8 are independently 0 or 1;
  • r3, r6 are independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • r4, r5 are independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10;
  • s1, s2 are independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;
  • Y 1 , Y 2 are identical or different and each is independently of the other selected from formulas (f-i) to (f-vii):
  • b is 1, 2, 3 or 4
  • crosslinker reagent is a compound of formula (V-II):
  • D 1 , D 2 , D 3 and D 4 are identical or different and each is independently of the others selected from the group comprising O, NR 5 , S and CR 5 R 5a ;
  • R 1 , R 1a , R 2 , R 2a , R 3 , R 3a , R 4 , R 4a , R 5 and R 5a are identical or different and each is independently of the others selected from the group comprising H and C 1-6 alkyl; optionally, one or more of the pair(s) R 1 /R 1a , R 2 /R 2a , R 3 /R 3a , R 4 /R 4a , R 1 /R 2 , R 3 /R 4 , R 1a /R 2a , and R 3a /R 4a form a chemical bond or are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C 3-8 cycloalkyl or to form a ring A or are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl or adamantyl;
  • A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl and tetralinyl;
  • P 2 is m ranges from 11 to 908, preferably from 17 to 680, even more preferably from 22 to 454, even more preferably from 22 to 227, even more preferably from 22 to 170 and more preferably from 45 to 90;
  • r1, r2, r7, r8 are independently 0 or 1;
  • r3, r6 are independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • r4, r5 are independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10;
  • s1, s2 are independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;
  • Y 1 , Y 2 are identical or different and each is independently of the other selected from formulas (f-i) to (f-vii):
  • b is 1, 2, 3 or 4
  • X H is Cl, Br, I, or F. It is understood that the moieties
  • Y 1 and Y 2 of formula (V-I) or (V-II) have a structure of formula (f-i), (f-ii) or (f- v). More preferably, Y 1 and Y 2 of formula (V-I) or (V-II) have a structure of formula (f-i) or (f-ii) and most preferably, Y 1 and Y 2 have a structure of formula (f-i).
  • both moieties Y 1 and Y 2 of formula (V-I) or (V-II) have the same structure. More preferably, both moieties Y 1 and Y 2 have the structure of formula (f-i).
  • r1 of formula (V-I) or (V-II) is 0.
  • r1 and s1 of formula (V-I) or (V-II) are both 0.
  • one or more of the pair(s) R 1 /R 1a , R 2 /R 2a , R 3 /R 3a , R 4 /R 4a , R 1 /R 2 , R 3 /R 4 , R 1a /R 2a , and R 3a /R 4a of formula (V-I) or (V-II) form a chemical bond or are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C 3-8 cycloalkyl or form a ring A.
  • one or more of the pair(s) R 1 /R 2 , R 1a /R 2a , R 3 /R 4 , R 3a /R 4a of formula (V-I) or (V-II) are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl.
  • crosslinker reagent of formula (V-I) and (V-II) is symmetric, i.e. the moiety
  • s1, s2, r1 and r8 of formula (V-I) and (V-II) are 0.
  • Preferred crosslinker reagents are of formula (V-1) to (V-54):
  • each crosslinker reagent may be in the form of its racemic mixture, where applicable; and m, Y 1 and Y 2 are defined as above.
  • Crosslinker reagents V-11 to V-54, V-1 and V-2 are preferred crosslinker reagents.
  • Crosslinker reagents Va-11 to Va-54, Va-1 and Va-2 are most preferred crosslinker reagents. Most preferred is crosslinker reagent Va-14.
  • crosslinker reagents V-1, V-2, V-5, V-6, V-7, V-8, V-9, V-10, V-11, V-12, V-13, V-14, V-15, V-16, V-17, V-18, V-19, V-20, V-21, V-22, V-23, V-24, V-25, V- 26, V-27, V-28, V-29, V-30, V-31, V-32, V-33, V-34, V-35, V-36, V-37, V-38, V-39, V-40, V-41, V-42, V-43, V-44, V-45, V-46, V-47, V-48, V-49, V-50, V-51, V-52, V-53 an V-54 are preferred crosslinker reagents.
  • the at least one crosslinker reagent is of formula V-5, V-6, V-7, V-8, V-9, V-10, V-14, V-22, V-23, V-43, V-44, V-45 or V-46, and most preferably, the at least one crosslinker reagent is of formula V-5, V-6, V-9 or V-14.
  • the preferred embodiments of the compound of formula (V-I) and (V-II) as mentioned above apply accordingly to the preferred compounds of formulas (V-1) to (V-53).
  • the hydrogel comprises A x0 in the form of primary or secondary amine functional groups.
  • such hydrogel contains from 0.01 to 1 mmol/g primary amine groups (-NH 2 ), more preferably, from 0.02 to 0.5 mmol/g primary amine groups and most preferably from 0.05 to 0.3 mmol/g primary amine groups.
  • the term“X mmol/g primary amine groups” means that 1 g of dry hydrogel comprises X mmol primary amine groups. Measurement of the amine content of the hydrogel is carried out according to Gude et al. (Letters in Peptide Science, 2002, 9(4): 203-206, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety).
  • the term“dry” as used herein means having a residual water content of a maximum of 10%, preferably less than 5% and more preferably less than 2% (determined according to Karl Fischer).
  • the preferred method of drying is lyophilization.
  • the hydrogel may be modified by conjugating certain moieties other than L 1 to remaining functional groups A x0 , such as for example spacer moieties and/or polymers and that also such modified hydrogel may be one embodiment of Z.
  • -Z is a hydrogel obtainable from the process for the preparation of a hydrogel as detailed above which is optionally modified by conjugating a spacer moiety- fatty acid or polymer moiety conjugate -SP 0 -Z 0 to remaining functional groups A x0 .
  • Such spacer moiety -SP 0 - is preferably selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(R z1 )-, -S(O) 2 N(R z1 )-, -S(O)N(R z1 )-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O)-,
  • -R z1 and -R z1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, -T, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -R z2 , which are the same or different, and wherein C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-,
  • each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered
  • each -R z3 , -R z3a , -R z4 , -R z4a , -R z5 , -R z5a and -R z5b is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, and C 1-6 alkyl; wherein C 1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
  • -Z 0 comprises a C 8-18 alkyl group.
  • -Z 0 comprises a water-soluble polymer with a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa.
  • -Z 0 comprises at least one of the polymers selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazo
  • the poly(amide) is a peptide or protein.
  • -Z 0 comprises a PEG-based polymer comprising at last 10% PEG, such as at least 20 % PEG, at least 30 % PEG, at least 40 % PEG or at least 50% PEG; or a hyaluronic acid-based polymer comprising at least 10 % hyaluronic acid, such as at least 20 % hyaluronic acid, at least 30% hyaluronic acid, at least 40 % hyaluronic acid or at least 50 % hyaluronic acid.
  • prodrugs their pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the prodrug reagents of the present invention -L 2 - and -L 2’ - of formula (I) and (I’) are independently of each other a chemical bond or a spacer moiety.
  • -L 2 - and -L 2’ - are preferably independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(R y1 )-, -S(O) 2 N(R y1 )-, -S(O)N(R y1 )-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O)-, -N(R y1 )S(O) 2 N(R y1a )-, -S-, -N(R y1 )-, -OC(OR y1 )(R y1a )-, -N(R y1 )C(O)N(R y1a )-, -OC(O)N(R y1 )-, C 1-50 alky
  • -R y1 and -R y1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, -T, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T, C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -R y2 , which are the same or different, and wherein C 1-50 alkyl, C 2-50 alkenyl, and C 2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)
  • each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered
  • -L 2 - and -L 2’ - are other than a single chemical bond
  • -L 2 - and -L 2’ - are even more preferably independently of each selected from -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-,
  • -R y1 and -R y1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, -T, C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, and C 2-10 alkynyl; wherein -T, C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl, and C 2-10 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more-R y2 , which are the same or different, and wherein C 1-10 alkyl, C 2-10 alkenyl
  • each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered
  • each -R y3 , -R y3a , -R y4 , -R y4a , -R y5 , -R y5a and -R y5b is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, and C 1-6 alkyl; wherein C 1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
  • -L 2 - and -L 2’ - are other than a single chemical bond
  • -L 2 - and -L 2’ - are even more preferably independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(R y1 )-, -S(O) 2 N(R y1 )-, -S(O)N(R y1 )-, -S(O) 2 -,
  • -T-, C 1-20 alkyl, C 2-20 alkenyl, and C 2-20 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -R y2 , which are the same or different and wherein C 1-20 alkyl, C 2-20 alkenyl, and C 2-20 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-,
  • -R y1 and -R y1a are independently selected from the group consisting of -H, -T, C 1-10 alkyl, C 2- 10 alkenyl, and C 2-10 alkynyl; each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered carbopol
  • -L 2 - and -L 2’ - are a C 1-20 alkyl chain, which is optionally interrupted by one or more groups independently selected from -O-, -T- and -C(O)N(R 1aa )-; and which C 1-20 alkyl chain is optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from -OH, -T and -C(O)N(R y6 R y6a ); wherein -R y6 , -R y6a are independently selected from the group consisting of H and C 1-4 alkyl and wherein -T- is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered
  • dashed lines indicate attachment to the rest of -L 2 -;
  • -R and -R a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl and hexyl.
  • -L 2 -Z and -L 2’ -Y can be attached to -L 1 - of formula (I) or (I’) by replacing any -H present.
  • -R 1 , -R 1a , -R 2 , -R 3 , -R 4 , -R 4a , -R 5 , -R 5a , -R 6 , -R 7 and -R 7a are replaced by -L 2 -Z and/or -L 2’ - Y. More preferably, only one hydrogen of -L 1 - of formula (I) or (I’) is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -L 1 - of formula (I) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z and that -L 1 - of formula (I’) is substituted with one moiety -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 4a of formula (I) is substituted with -L 2 -Z, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R 4a is replaced by -L 2 -Z.
  • -R 4a is -H which is replaced by -L 2 -Z.
  • -R 4a of formula (I’) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R 4a is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 4a is -H which is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 4 of formula (I) is substituted with -L 2 -Z, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R 4 is replaced by -L 2 -Z.
  • -R 4 is -H which is replaced by -L 2 -Z.
  • -R 4 of formula (I’) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R 4 is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 4 is -H which is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 1 of formula (I) is substituted with -L 2 -Z, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R 1 is replaced by -L 2 -Z.
  • -R 1 is -H which is replaced by -L 2 -Z.
  • -R 1 of formula (I’) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R 1 is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 1 is -H which is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 1a of formula (I) is substituted with -L 2 -Z, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R 1a is replaced by -L 2 -Z.
  • -R 1a is -H which is replaced by -L 2 -Z.
  • -R 1a of formula (I’) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R 1a is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 1a is -H which is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 3 of formula (I) is substituted with -L 2 -Z, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R 3 is replaced by -L 2 -Z.
  • -R 3 is -H which is replaced by -L 2 -Z.
  • -R 3 of formula (I’) is substituted with -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R 3 is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • -R 3 is -H which is replaced by -L 2 -Z or -L 2’ -Y.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a method of synthesis of a prodrug or
  • the method of synthesis of a prodrug of the present invention comprises the steps of (a) Providing a reagent comprising a moiety Y-L 2’ -L 1 -Q,
  • -Y is a functional group
  • -Q is -OH or a leaving group
  • step (b) Reacting -Q of the reagent of step (a) with a primary or secondary amine or hydroxyl functional group of a drug D-H by forming an amide or ester linkage
  • the drug optionally comprises further functional groups which may optionally be protected with protecting groups;
  • step (c) Reacting a reagent comprising Z having at least one functional group -Y’ with -Y of the intermediate of step (b) by forming a linkage between Z and -L 2’ -, resulting in Z being conjugated to at least one moiety -L 2 -L 1 -D;
  • step (d) Optionally removing the protecting groups present.
  • one or more functional groups -Y’ of Z react with a functional group -Y, i.e. that one or more reagents of step (a) are conjugated to Z.
  • Preferred embodiments for -Y, -L 1 -, -L 2’ -, -L 2 -, -D and -Q are as described above.
  • the method of synthesis of a prodrug of the present invention comprises the steps of
  • -Y is a functional group
  • -Q is -OH or a leaving group
  • step (b) Reacting a reagent comprising Z having at least one functional group -Y’ with -Y of the reagent of step (a) by forming a linkage between Z and -L 2’ -, resulting in Z being conjugated to at least one moiety -L 2 -L 1 -Q ;
  • step (c) Reacting -Q of the intermediate of step (b) with a primary or secondary amine or hydroxyl functional group of a drug D-H by forming an amide or ester linkage between L 1 and D, respectively; wherein the drug optionally comprises further functional groups which may optionally be protected with protecting groups;
  • step (d) Optionally removing the protecting groups present.
  • one or more functional groups -Y’ of Z react with a functional group -Y, i.e. that one or more reagents of step (a) are conjugated to Z.
  • Preferred embodiments for -Y, -L 1 -, -L 2’ -, -L 2 -, -D and -Q are as described above.
  • Preferred embodiments of -Y’ correspond to the preferred embodiments of -Y as described above. The person skilled in the art is aware that not every Y can be used in combination with any Y’ and will have no problem identifying suitable pairs.
  • Preferred pairs Y/Y’ are the following:
  • ⁇ Y is maleimide, Y’ is selected from thiol, amine and selenide;
  • ⁇ Y’ is maleimide, Y is selected from thiol, amine and selenide;
  • ⁇ Y is selected from formulas (z’vi), (z’iii) and (z’iv), Y’ is of formula (z’x);
  • ⁇ Y’ is selected from formulas (z’vi), (z’iii) and (z’iv), Y is of formula (z’x);
  • ⁇ Y’ is of formula (z’xx), Y is azide;
  • ⁇ Y is of formula (z’viii), Y’ is of formula (z’i);
  • ⁇ Y’ is of formula (z’viii), Y is of formula (z’i);
  • ⁇ Y is of formula (z’ix), Y’ is of formula (z’iv); It is understood that the above listed pairs Y/Y’ are preferred examples and do not represent a comprehensive list of all possible pairs.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is a pharmaceutical composition comprising the prodrug of the present invention and one or more excipients.
  • a further aspect of the present invention is the prodrug of the present invention or the pharmaceutical composition comprising the prodrug of the present invention for use as a medicament.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is the prodrug or the pharmaceutical composition comprising the prodrug of the present invention for use in a method of treatment of a disease which can be treated with the corresponding drug released from the prodrug.
  • Another aspect of the present invention is the use of the prodrug or the pharmaceutical composition comprising the prodrug of the present invention for the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disease which can be treated with the corresponding drug released from the prodrug.
  • a further aspect of the present invention is a method of treating, controlling, delaying or preventing in a mammalian patient, preferably a human patient, in need of the treatment, control, delay or prevention of one or more diseases which can be treated with the corresponding drug released from the prodrug, comprising the step of administering to said patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of the prodrug or the
  • An additional aspect of the present invention is a method of administering the prodrug or the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention, wherein the method comprises the step of administering the prodrug or the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention via topical, enteral or parenteral administration and by methods of external application, injection or infusion, including intraarticular, periarticular, intradermal, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous, intraosseous, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intravitreal, intratympanic, intravesical, intracardiac, transtracheal, subcuticular, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, intraventricular, intrasternal injection and infusion, direct delivery to the brain via implanted device allowing delivery of the invention or the like to brain tissue or brain fluids (e.g., Ommaya Reservoir), direct intracerebroventricular injection or infusion, injection or infusion into brain or brain associated regions, injection into the subchoroidal space, retro
  • PEG 2 (example 1) was obtained from Biomatrik Inc., Jiaxing, China.
  • 2-chlorotrityl resin PyBOP, HATU and amino acids were purchased from Novabiochem, Merck Chemicals GmbH, Schwalbach, Germany.
  • TFA was purchased from Carl Roth GmbH & Co. KG, Düsseldorf, Germany.
  • Preparative LPLC was done on a reverse phase column (Biotage SNAP KP-C18-HS) connected to an Isolera One system from Biotage AB, Sweden. Products were detected at 215 nm. Gradients of solution A (0.1% TFA in H 2 O) and solution B (0.1% TFA in acetonitrile) were used. Fractions containing product were combined and lyophilized. Flash chromatography purifications were performed on an Isolera One system from Biotage AB, Sweden, using Biotage KP-Sil silica cartridges and n-heptane, and ethyl acetate as eluents. Products were detected at 254 nm.
  • Analytical LCMS was performed on a Waters Acquity UPLC with an Acquity PDA detector coupled to a Waters Micromass ZQ or an Agilent technologies 1290 system with a G4212A diode array and a G6120B single quad MS system equipped with a Waters ACQUITY UPLC BEH300 C18 reverse phase column (2.1 x 50 mm, 300 ⁇ , 1.7 ⁇ m, flow: 0.25 ml/min; solvent A: H 2 0 + 0.04% TFA, solvent B: acetonitrile + 0.05% TFA).
  • Analytical UPLC-MS for protein conjugation reaction was performed on an Agilent 1290 Infinity system with an Acquity PDA detector coupled to an iFunnel QTOF equipped with a Waters ACQUITY UPLC BEH300 C4 reverse phase column (2.1 x 50 mm, 300 ⁇ , 1.7 ⁇ m, flow: 0.25 ml/min; solvent A: H 2 0 + 0.05% TFA, solvent B: acetonitrile + 0.04% TFA).
  • Example 1 Example 1:
  • Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH (1) (277.38 mg; 0.65 mmol; 1.00 eq.), m-dPEG8-amine (2) (250.00 mg; 0.65 mmol; 1.00 eq.) and PyBOP (508.89 mg; 0.98 mmol; 1.50 eq.) were dissolved in anhydrous DMF, (5.00 ml). Then DIPEA (340.66 ⁇ l; 1.96 mmol; 3.00 eq.) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (15 ml) and the organic solution was washed with 1 M HCl (3x 15 ml) and brine (15 ml). The organic phase was dried over MgSO 4 , filtered and
  • 2-chlorotrityl chloride resin (1.33 mmol/g; 173 mg; 230 ⁇ mol, 1 eq.) was placed in a 5 ml syringe reactor and swollen in 1 ml DCM, and then the solvent was drained.
  • Carboxylic acid 4 (151.00 mg; 183.67 ⁇ mol; 3.99 eq.) and PyBOP (83.90 mg; 161.22 ⁇ mol; 3.50 eq.) were dissolved in DMF (1.00 ml).
  • DIPEA 56.16 ⁇ l; 322.44 ⁇ mol; 7.00 eq.
  • resin 5 (60.00 mg; 46.06 ⁇ mol; 1.00 eq.).
  • the reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 3 h.
  • the resin was washed 5 times with 1 ml of DMF and 5 times with 5 ml of DCM.
  • the resin was dried under high vacuum for 10 minutes.
  • Step 2 A solution of 20% piperidine in DMF (1 ml) was drawn into the syringe reactor, containing Fmoc protected amine 6. The reaction mixture was shaken for 15 minutes. The procedure was repeated once. The resin was washed 5 times with 1 ml of DMF and 5 times with 5 ml of DCM. Step 3:
  • the reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and the organic solution is washed with 1 M HCl and brine. The organic phase is dried over MgSO 4 , filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash
  • the protected insulin-linker conjugate 16 is stirred in a mixture of 9:1:0.25 HFIP/TFA/TES until the Boc group is removed completely. The solution is concentrated and the crude product is purified by preparative HPLC to yield final conjugate 17.
  • Example 7
  • Boc-Glu-OFm 72 mg; 170 ⁇ mol; 2.00 eq.
  • PyBOP 88.5 mg; 170 ⁇ mol; 2.00 eq.
  • DIPEA 0.06 mL; 340 ⁇ mol; 4.00 eq.
  • resin 5 100.00 mg; 85.00 ⁇ mol; 1.00 eq.
  • the reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 2 h.
  • the resin was washed 5 times with 1 ml of DMF.
  • 6-bromohexanoic acid (5.89 g; 30.19 mmol; 1.00 eq.) and sodium methanethiosulfonate (4.05 g; 30.19 mmol; 1.00 eq.) were dissolved in DMF (47.10 ml) under argon-atmosphere.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 3 hours and then brought to room temperature.
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with 116 ml water and was washed three times with 233 ml of diethyl ether.
  • the organic phase was washed with brine (350 ml), dried over MgSO 4 , filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of 40 ml.
  • the product was precipitated from the resulting solution in 2x 1150 ml of cold n-heptane. Precipitation was completed overnight at -18 °C. The supernatant was decanted and the precipitate was dissolved in 80 ml diethylether. The product was precipitated from the resulting solution in 2x 1000 ml of cold n-heptane. The suspension was stored at -18 °C for 2 hours. The precipitate was filtered and the solid was dried under high vacuum over night to give 34 as white solid.
  • the reaction mixture was cooled to 0°C with an ice bath and was quenched with TFA (3.17 mL; 41.08 mmol; 3.00 eq.).
  • the solution was diluted with 100 ml of water (pH ⁇ 2) and was washed three times with 100 ml of ethyl acetate.
  • the aqueous phase was frozen and lyophilized.
  • the residue was co- evaporated with ethyl acetate.
  • the residue was dissolved in 60 ml of dichloromethane and the solution was dried with Na 2 SO 4 , filtered and evaporated. The residue was dried under HV for 2 hours.
  • Boc-Glu(OtBu)-OH (380.01 mg; 1.25 mmol; 1.00 eq.) was dissolved in DMF (9.09 mL). PyBOP (977.85 mg; 1.88 mmol; 1.50 eq.), DIPEA (1.09 mL; 6.26 mmol; 5.00 eq.) and Fmoc-2-(2-aminoethoxy)-ethylamine hydrochloride (500.00 mg; 1.38 mmol; 1.10 eq.) were added. The mixture was stirred for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was diluted with 50 ml dichloromethane and was washed three times with 50 ml of 0.1 N HCl.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to novel prodrugs of primary or secondary amine-comprising biologically active moieties and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, prodrug reagents, pharmaceutical compositions comprising said prodrugs and the use of prodrugs.

Description

Prodrugs Comprising a Pyroglutamate Linker The present application claims priority from European Patent Application No.
EP 15169843.8 filed on May 29, 2015, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The present invention relates to novel prodrugs of primary or secondary amine-comprising biologically active moieties and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, prodrug reagents, pharmaceutical compositions comprising said prodrugs and the use of said prodrugs. To improve physicochemical or pharmacokinetic properties of a drug in vivo such drug can be conjugated to a carrier. Typically, carriers in drug delivery are either used in non-covalent complexation of drug and carrier, or by covalent attachment of a carrier reagent to one of the drug‘s functional groups. However, the non-covalent approach requires a highly efficient drug-carrier complexation to prevent uncontrolled, burst-type release of the drug due to disintegration of the drug-carrier complex after administration. Restraining the diffusion of an unbound, water soluble drug molecule requires strong van der Waals contacts, frequently mediated through hydrophobic moieties and charged moieties for electrostatic binding. Many conformationally sensitive drugs, such as proteins or peptides, are rendered dysfunctional during the complexation process and/or during subsequent storage of the non-covalently bound drug.. Alternatively, a drug may be covalently conjugated to a carrier via a stable linker or a reversible prodrug linker moiety from which the drug is released. If the drug is stably connected to the carrier, such a conjugate needs to exhibit sufficient residual activity to have a pharmaceutical effect, thus the conjugate is constantly in an active form. If the drug is conjugated to the carrier through a reversible prodrug linker, such conjugates are referred to as carrier-linked prodrugs. The advantage of this approach is that no residual activity of the conjugate is needed, because the drug exhibits its pharmacological effect upon release from the conjugate. A carrier-linked prodrug may exhibit no or little drug activity, i.e. the carrier-linked prodrug is pharmacologically inactive. This approach is applied to various classes of molecules, from so-called small molecules, through natural products up to large proteins. The biologically active moiety of such a carrier-linked prodrug can be released by enzymatic or non-enzymatic cleavage of the linkage between the carrier and the biologically active moiety, or by a sequential combination of both. However, enzyme-dependence is usually less preferred, because enzyme levels may vary significantly between patients what makes the correct dosing difficult. Various non-enzymatically cleavable reversible prodrug linkers are known in the art, such as for example those disclosed in WO2005/099768 A2, WO2006/136586 A2, WO2009/095479 A2, WO2011/012722 A1, WO2011/089214 A1, WO2011/089216 A1 and WO2011/089215 A1. Given the multitude of different drugs, it is desirable to have a large portfolio of reversible prodrug linkers available to identify the one that is most suitable. Not only are different release half-lives needed, but not every linker is suitable for every type of conjugation chemistry. Especially when sensitive drugs, such as proteins, are to be converted into prodrugs the conjugation conditions (including the cleavage of potentially necessary protecting groups) need to be sufficiently mild to ensure integrity of the biologically active moiety. It is therefore an object of the present invention to at least partially overcome the above- mentioned disadvantage. This object is achieved with a prodrug or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof comprising a conjugate D-L, wherein -D is a primary or secondary amine-comprising biologically active moiety; and -L comprises a linker moiety -L1 represented by formula (I)
Figure imgf000004_0001
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to the primary or secondary amine of the biologically active moiety; -X1 is selected from the group consisting of -CR5R5a-, -O-, -NR5- and -S-; -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a are independently of other selected from -H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl, C1-6 alkynyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl, C1-6 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more R6, which are the same or different; and wherein C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl, C1-6 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-,
-C(O)N(R7)-, -S(O)2N(R7)-, -S(O)N(R7)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(R7)S(O)2N(R7a)-, -S-, -N(R7)-, -OC(OR7)(R7a)-, -N(R7)C(O)N(R7a)-, and -OC(O)N(R7)-; provided that the nitrogen marked with the asterisk is connected to -R2 through an SP3-hybridized carbon atom; each T is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered
heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more R6, which are the same or different; each -R6, -R7, -R7a is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; =Y1 is selected from =O and =NR5; Optionally, one or more of the pairs -R1/-R1a, -R2/-R3, -R5/-R5a and -R4/-R4a are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10- membered heterocyclyl or a 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; Optionally, one or more of the
pairs -R1/-R2, -R1/-R3, -R1/-R5, -R1/-R5a, -R1a/-R2, -R1a/-R3, -R1a/-R5, -R1a/-R5a, -R2/-R5 , -R2/-R5a, -R3/-R5, -R3/-R5a are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring -A-; -A- is selected from the group consisting of phenyl; naphthyl; indenyl; indanyl;
tetralinyl; C3-10 cycloalkyl; 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl; and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein -L1 is substituted with one to five moieties -L2-Z, preferably -L1 is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z, and is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (I) is not replaced by a substituent; wherein -L2- is a single chemical bond or a spacer moiety; and -Z is a carrier moiety. It was surprisingly found that the reversible prodrug linker moiety -L1- of formula (I) has advantageous properties, such as an increased stability of the activated corresponding reagent under conditions particularly beneficial for the conjugation of proteins. Within the present invention the terms are used with the meaning as follows: The term“drug” as used herein refers to a substance used in the treatment, cure, prevention, or diagnosis of a disease or used to otherwise enhance physical or mental well-being. If a drug is conjugated to another moiety, the part of the resulting product that originated from the drug is referred to as“biologically active moiety”. It is understood that the term“primary or secondary amine-comprising drug” refers to a drug having at least one primary or secondary amine functional group, respectively, which primary or secondary amine-comprising drug may optionally have one or more further functional group(s) including one or more additional primary and/or secondary amine functional group(s). If such primary or secondary amine-comprising drug is conjugated to, for example, a moiety -L1, it is referred to as“primary or secondary amine-comprising biologically active moiety”, even though it is understood that said primary or secondary amine functional group became part of the amide bond connecting both moieties. As used herein the term“prodrug” or“carrier-linked prodrug” refers to a biologically active moiety reversibly and covalently connected to a specialized protective group through a reversible prodrug linker moiety comprising a reversible linkage with the biologically active moiety to alter or to eliminate undesirable properties in the parent molecule. This also includes the enhancement of desirable properties in the drug and the suppression of undesirable properties. The specialized non-toxic protective group is referred to as“carrier”. A prodrug releases it reversibly and covalently bound biologically active moiety in the form of its corresponding drug. A“biodegradable linkage” or a“reversible linkage” is a linkage that is hydrolytically degradable, i.e. cleavable, in the absence of enzymes under physiological conditions (aqueous buffer at pH 7.4, 37°C) with a half-life ranging from one hour to twelve months. In contrast, a“permanent linkage” is not hydrolytically degradable, i.e. cleavable, in the absence of enzymes under physiological conditions (aqueous buffer at pH 7.4, 37°C) with a half-life of less than twelve months. As used herein, the term“traceless prodrug linker” means a reversible prodrug linker which upon cleavage releases the drug in its free form. As used herein, the term“free form” of a drug means the drug in its unmodified, pharmacologically active form. The reversible prodrug linker of the present invention, L1, is a traceless prodrug linker. As used herein, the term "excipient" refers to a diluent, adjuvant, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered. Such pharmaceutical excipient can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, including but not limited to peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. Water is a preferred excipient when the pharmaceutical composition is administered orally. Saline and aqueous dextrose are preferred excipients when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions are preferably employed as liquid excipients for injectable solutions. Suitable pharmaceutical excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, trehalose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like. The pharmaceutical composition, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, like, for example, acetate, succinate, tris, carbonate, phosphate, HEPES (4- (2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid), MES (2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid), or can contain detergents, like Tween, poloxamers, poloxamines, CHAPS, Igepal, or amino acids like, for example, glycine, lysine, or histidine. These pharmaceutical compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsions, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like. The pharmaceutical composition can be formulated as a suppository, with traditional binders and excipients such as triglycerides. Oral formulation can include standard excipients such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Such compositions will contain a therapeutically effective amount of the drug or biologically active moiety, together with a suitable amount of excipient so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient. The formulation should suit the mode of administration. As used herein, the term“hydrogel” means a hydrophilic or amphiphilic polymeric network composed of homopolymers or copolymers, which is insoluble due to the presence of covalent chemical crosslinks. The crosslinks provide the network structure and physical integrity. Hydrogels exhibit a thermodynamic compatibility with water which allows them to swell in aqueous media. As used herein, the term“reagent” means a chemical compound which comprises at least one functional group for reaction with the functional group of another chemical compound or drug. It is understood that a drug comprising a functional group (such as a primary or secondary amine functional group) is also a reagent. As used herein, the term“backbone reagent” means a reagent, which is suitable as a starting material for forming hydrogels. As used herein, a backbone reagent preferably does not comprise biodegradable linkages. A backbone reagent may comprise a“branching core” which term refers to an atom or moiety to which more than one other moiety is attached. As used herein, the term“crosslinker reagent” means a linear or branched reagent, which is suitable as a starting material for crosslinking backbone reagents. Preferably, the crosslinker reagent is a linear chemical compound. A crosslinker reagent preferably comprises at least one biodegradable linkage. As used herein, the term“moiety” means a part of a molecule, which lacks one or more atom(s) compared to the corresponding reagent. If, for example, a reagent of the formula “H-X-H” reacts with another reagent and becomes part of the reaction product, the corresponding moiety of the reaction product has the structure“H–X–“ or“–X–“ , whereas each“–“ indicates attachment to another moiety. Accordingly, a biologically active moiety is released from a prodrug as a drug. Accordingly, the phrase“in bound form” is used to refer to the corresponding moiety of a reagent, i.e.“lysine in bound form” refers to a lysine moiety which lacks one or more atom(s) of the lysine reagent and is part of a molecule. It is understood that if the sequence or chemical structure of a group of atoms is provided which group of atoms is attached to two moieties or is interrupting a moiety, said sequence or chemical structure can be attached to the two moieties in either orientation, unless explicitly stated otherwise. For example, a moiety“-C(O)N(R)-“ can be attached to two moieties or interrupting a moiety either as“-C(O)N(R)-“ or as“-N(R)C(O)-“. Similarly, a moiety
Figure imgf000008_0001
can be attached to two moieties or can interrupt a moiety either as
Figure imgf000009_0001
. As used herein, the term“functional group” means a group of atoms which can react with other groups of atoms. Functional groups include but are not limited to the following groups: carboxylic acid (–(C=O)OH), primary or secondary amine (–NH2,–NH–), maleimide, thiol (-SH), sulfonic acid (–(O=S=O)OH), carbonate, carbamate (–O(C=O)N<), hydroxyl (–OH), aldehyde (–(C=O)H), ketone (–(C=O)–), hydrazine (>N-N<), isocyanate, isothiocyanate, phosphoric acid (–O(P=O)OHOH), phosphonic acid (–O(P=O)OHH), haloacetyl, alkyl halide, acryloyl, aryl fluoride, hydroxylamine, disulfide, vinyl sulfone, vinyl ketone, diazoalkane, oxirane, and aziridine. As used herein, the term“activated functional group” means a functional group, which is connected to an activating group, i.e. a functional group was reacted with an activating reagent. Preferred activated functional groups include but are not limited to activated ester groups, activated carbamate groups, activated carbonate groups and activated thiocarbonate groups. Preferred activating groups are selected from formulas (f-i) to (f-vii):
Figure imgf000009_0002
(f-v) , (f-vi) , and
Figure imgf000010_0001
Figure imgf000010_0002
wherein
the dashed lines indicate attachment to the rest of the molecule;
b is 1, 2, 3 or 4; and
XH is Cl, Br, I, or F. Accordingly, a preferred activated ester has the formula
-(C=O)-XF,
wherein
XF is selected from formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated carbamate has the formula
-N-(C=O)-XF,
wherein
XF is selected from formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated carbonate has the formula
-O-(C=O)-XF,
wherein
XF is selected from formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). Accordingly, a preferred activated thioester has the formula
-S-(C=O)-XF, wherein
XF is selected from formula (f-i), (f-ii), (f-iii), (f-iv), (f-v), (f-vi) and (f-vii). As used herein, the term“protecting group” means a moiety which is reversibly connected to a functional group to render it incapable of reacting with, for example, another functional group. Suitable alcohol (-OH) protecting groups are, for example, acetyl, benzoyl, benzyl, β- methoxyethoxymethyl ether, dimethoxytrityl, methoxymethyl ether, methoxytrityl, p- methoxybenzyl ether, methylthiomethyl ether, pivaloyl, tetrahydropyranyl, trityl,
trimethylsilyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl, tri-iso-propylsilyloxymethyl, triisopropylsilyl ether, methyl ether, and ethoxyethyl ether. Suitable amine protecting groups are, for example, ortho nitrobenzosulfonyl, carbobenzyloxy, p-methoxybenzyl carbonyl, tert-butyloxycarbonyl, 9- fluorenylmethyloxyarbonyl, acetyl, benzoyl, benzyl, carbamate, p-methoxybenzyl, 3,4- dimethoxybenzyl, p-methoxyphenyl, and tosyl. Suitable carbonyl protecting groups are, for example, acetals and ketals, acylals and dithianes. Suitable carboxylic acid protecting groups are, for example, methyl esters, benzyl esters, tert-butyl esters, 2,6-dimethylphenol, 2,6- diisopropylphenol, 2,6.-di-tert-butylphenol, silyl esters, orthoesters, and oxazoline. Suitable phosphate protecting groups are, for example, 2-cyanoethyl and methyl. In case the compounds according to formula (I) or (I’) contain one or more acidic or basic groups, the invention also comprises their corresponding pharmaceutically or toxicologically acceptable salts, in particular their pharmaceutically utilizable salts. Thus, the compounds of the formula (I) or (I’) which contain acidic groups can be used according to the invention, for example, as alkali metal salts, alkaline earth metal salts or as ammonium salts. More precise examples of such salts include sodium salts, potassium salts, calcium salts, magnesium salts or salts with ammonia or organic amines such as, for example, ethylamine, ethanolamine, triethanolamine or amino acids. Compounds of the formula (I) or (I’) which contain one or more basic groups, i.e. groups which can be protonated, can be present and can be used according to the invention in the form of their addition salts with inorganic or organic acids. Examples for suitable acids include hydrogen chloride, hydrogen bromide, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, methanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenedisulfonic acids, oxalic acid, acetic acid, tartaric acid, lactic acid, salicylic acid, benzoic acid, formic acid, propionic acid, pivalic acid, diethylacetic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, pimelic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, malic acid, sulfaminic acid, phenylpropionic acid, gluconic acid, ascorbic acid, isonicotinic acid, citric acid, adipic acid, and other acids known to the person skilled in the art. For the person skilled in the art further methods are known for converting the basic group into a cation like the alkylation of an amine group resulting in a positively- charge ammonium group and an appropriate counterion of the salt. If the compounds of the formula (I) or (I’) simultaneously contain acidic and basic groups in the molecule, the invention also includes, in addition to the salt forms mentioned, inner salts or betaines (zwitterions). The respective salts according to the formula (I) or (I’) can be obtained by customary methods which are known to the person skilled in the art like, for example by contacting these with an organic or inorganic acid or base in a solvent or dispersant, or by anion exchange or cation exchange with other salts. The present invention also includes all salts of the compounds of the formula (I) or (I’) which, owing to low physiological compatibility, are not directly suitable for use in pharmaceuticals but which can be used, for example, as intermediates for chemical reactions or for the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable salts. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable" means approved by a regulatory agency such as the EMEA (Europe) and/or the FDA (US) and/or any other national regulatory agency for use in animals, preferably in humans. As used herein the term“small molecule biologically active moiety” refers to an organic biologically active moiety having a molecular weight of less than 1000 Da, such as less than 900 Da or less than 800 Da. As used herein, the term“oligonucleotide” refers to double- or single-stranded RNA and DNA with preferably 2 to 1000 nucleotides and any modifications thereof. Modifications include, but are not limited to, those which provide other chemical groups that incorporate additional charge, polarizability, hydrogen bonding, electrostatic interaction, and fluxionality to the nucleic acid ligand bases or to the nucleic acid ligand as a whole. Such modifications include, but are not limited, to 2’-position sugar modifications, 5-position pyrimidine modifications, 8-position purine modifications, modifications at exocyclic amines, substitution of 4-thiouridines, substitution of 5-bromo or 5-iodo-uracil; backbone modifications, methylations, unusual base-pairing combinations such as the isobases isocytidine and isoguanidine and the like. Modifications can also include 3’ and 5’ modifications such as capping and change of stereochemistry. The term also includes aptamers. The term“peptide nucleic acids” refers to organic polymers having a peptidic backbone, i.e. a backbone in which the monomers are connected to each other through peptide linkages, to which nucleobases, preferably adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine and uracil, are attached. A preferred backbone comprises N-(2-aminoethyl)-glycine. The term“peptide” as used herein refers to a chain of at least 2 and up to and including 50 amino acid monomer moieties linked by peptide (amide) linkages. The term“peptide” also includes peptidomimetics, such as D-peptides, peptoids or beta-peptides, and covers such peptidomimetic chains with up to and including 50 monomer moieties. As used herein, the term“protein” refers to a chain of more than 50 amino acid monomer moieties linked by peptide linkages, in which preferably no more than 12000 amino acid monomers are linked by peptide linkages, such as no more than 10000 amino acid monomer moieties, no more than 8000 amino acid monomer moieties, no more than 5000 amino acid monomer moieties or no more than 2000 amino acid monomer moieties. As used herein, the term“polymer” means a molecule comprising repeating structural units, i.e. the monomers, connected by chemical bonds in a linear, circular, branched, crosslinked or dendrimeric way or a combination thereof, which may be of synthetic or biological origin or a combination of both. It is understood that a polymer may also comprise one or more other chemical group(s) and/or moiety/moieties, such as, for example, one or more functional group(s). Preferably, a soluble polymer has a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa, e.g. a molecular weight of at least 1 kDa, a molecular weight of at least 2 kDa, a molecular weight of at least 3 kDa or a molecular weight of at least 5 kDa. If the polymer is soluble, it preferable has a molecular weight of at most 1000 kDa, such as at most 750 kDa, such as at most 500 kDa, such as at most 300 kDa, such as at most 200 kDa, such as at most 100 kDa. It is understood that for insoluble polymers, such as hydrogels, no meaningful molecular weight ranges can be provided. As used herein, the term“polymeric” means a reagent or a moiety comprising one or more polymer(s). The person skilled in the art understands that the polymerization products obtained from a polymerization reaction do not all have the same molecular weight, but rather exhibit a molecular weight distribution. Consequently, the molecular weight ranges, molecular weights, ranges of numbers of monomers in a polymer and numbers of monomers in a polymer as used herein, refer to the number average molecular weight and number average of monomers. As used herein, the term“number average molecular weight” means the ordinary arithmetic means of the molecular weights of the individual polymers. As used herein, the term“polymerization” or“polymerizing” means the process of reacting monomer or macromonomer reagents in a chemical reaction to form polymer chains or networks, including but not limited to hydrogels. As used herein, the term“macromonomer” means a molecule that was obtained from the polymerization of monomer reagents. As used herein, the term“condensation polymerization” or“condensation reaction” means a chemical reaction, in which the functional groups of two reagents react to form one single molecule, i.e. the reaction product, and a low molecular weight molecule, for example water, is released. As used herein, the term“suspension polymerization” means a heterogeneous and/or biphasic polymerization reaction, wherein the monomer reagents are dissolved in a first solvent, forming the disperse phase which is emulsified in a second solvent, forming the continuous phase. In the present invention, the monomer reagents are the at least one backbone reagent and the at least one crosslinker reagent. Both the first solvent and the monomer reagents are not soluble in the second solvent. Such emulsion is formed by stirring, shaking, exposure to ultrasound or Microsieve™ emulsification, more preferably by stirring or Microsieve™ emulsification and more preferably by stirring. This emulsion is stabilized by an appropriate emulsifier. The polymerization is initiated by addition of a base as initiator which is soluble in the first solvent. A suitable commonly known base suitable as initiator may be a tertiary base, such as tetramethylethylenediamine (TMEDA). As used herein, the term“polyamine” means a reagent or moiety comprising more than one amine (-NH- and/or -NH2), e.g. from 2 to 64 amines, from 4 to 48 amines, from 6 to 32 amines, from 8 to 24 amines, or from 10 to 16 amines. Particularly preferred polyamines comprise from 2 to 32 amines. As used herein, the term“hydrogel” means a hydrophilic or amphiphilic polymeric network composed of homopolymers or copolymers, which is insoluble due to the presence of covalent chemical crosslinks. The crosslinks provide the network structure and physical integrity. As used herein, the term“PEG-based comprising at least X% PEG” in relation to a moiety or reagent means that said moiety or reagent comprises at least X% (w/w) ethylene glycol units (-CH2CH2O-), wherein the ethylene glycol units may be arranged blockwise, alternating or may be randomly distributed within the moiety or reagent and preferably all ethylene glycol units of said moiety or reagent are present in one block; the remaining weight percentage of the PEG-based moiety or reagent are other moieties preferably selected from the following moieties and linkages:
^ C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, C2-50 alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered
heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; and
^ linkages selected from the group comprising
Figure imgf000015_0001
wherein
dashed lines indicate attachment to the remainder of the moiety or reagent, and R and Ra are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl and hexyl. The term“hyaluronic acid-based comprising at least X% hyaluronic acid” is used accordingly. The term“substituted” as used herein means that one or more -H atom(s) of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a different atom or a group of atoms, which are referred to as “substituent”. Preferably, no more than 6 -H atoms of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a substituent, such as 5 -H atoms of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a substituent, 4 -H atoms of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a substituent, 3 -H atoms of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a substituent, 2 -H atoms of a molecule or moiety are replaced by a substituent or 1 -H atom of a molecule or moiety is replaced by a substituent. Preferably, the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of
halogen, -CN, -COORx1, -ORx1, -C(O)Rx1, -C(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -S(O)2N(Rx1Rx1a),
-S(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -S(O)2Rx1, -S(O)Rx1, -N(Rx1)S(O)2N(Rx1aRx1b), -SRx1, -N(Rx1Rx1a), -NO2, -OC(O)Rx1, -N(Rx1)C(O)Rx1a, -N(Rx1)S(O)2Rx1a, -N(Rx1)S(O)Rx1a, -N(Rx1)C(O)ORx1a, -N(Rx1)C(O)N(Rx1aRx1b), -OC(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -T0, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T0, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -Rx2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T0-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(Rx3)-, -S(O)2N(Rx3)-, -S(O)N(Rx3)-, -S(O)2-,
-S(O)-, -N(Rx3)S(O)2N(Rx3a)-, -S-, -N(Rx3)-, -OC(ORx3)(Rx3a)-, -N(Rx3)C(O)N(Rx3a)-, and -OC(O)N(Rx3)-; -Rx1, -Rx1a, -Rx1b are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, -T0, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T0, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -Rx2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T0-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(Rx3)-, -S(O)2N(Rx3)-, -S(O)N(Rx3)-; -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(Rx3)S(O)2N(Rx3a)-, -S-, -N(Rx3)-, -OC(ORx3)(Rx3a)-, -N(Rx3)C(O)N(Rx3a)-, and -OC(O)N(Rx3)-; each T0 is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T0 is independently optionally substituted with one or more -Rx2, which are the same or different; each -Rx2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, -CN, oxo
(=O), -COORx4, -ORx4, -C(O)Rx4, -C(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), -S(O)2N(Rx4Rx4a), -S(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), -S(O)2Rx4, -S(O)Rx4, -N(Rx4)S(O)2N(Rx4aRx4b), -SRx4, -N(Rx4Rx4a), -NO2, -OC(O)Rx4, -N(Rx4)C(O)Rx4a, -N(Rx4)S(O)2Rx4a, -N(Rx4)S(O)Rx4a, -N(Rx4)C(O)ORx4a,
-N(Rx4)C(O)N(Rx4aRx4b), -OC(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; each -Rx3, -Rx3a, -Rx4, -Rx4a, -Rx4b is independently selected from the group consisting of -H and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different. More preferably, the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of
halogen, -CN, -COORx1, -ORx1, -C(O)Rx1, -C(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -S(O)2N(Rx1Rx1a),
-S(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -S(O)2Rx1, -S(O)Rx1, -N(Rx1)S(O)2N(Rx1aRx1b), -SRx1, -N(Rx1Rx1a), -NO2, -OC(O)Rx1, -N(Rx1)C(O)Rx1a, -N(Rx1)S(O)2Rx1a, -N(Rx1)S(O)Rx1a, -N(Rx1)C(O)ORx1a, -N(Rx1)C(O)N(Rx1aRx1b), -OC(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -T0, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl; wherein -T0, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -Rx2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T0-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(Rx3)-, -S(O)2N(Rx3)-, -S(O)N(Rx3)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(Rx3)S(O)2N(Rx3a)-, -S-, -N(Rx3)-, -OC(ORx3)(Rx3a)-, -N(Rx3)C(O)N(Rx3a)-,
and -OC(O)N(Rx3)-; each -Rx1, -Rx1a, -Rx1b, -Rx3, -Rx3a is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, halogen, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl; each T0 is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T0 is independently optionally substituted with one or more -Rx2, which are the same or different; each -Rx2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, -CN, oxo
(=O), -COORx4, -ORx4, -C(O)Rx4, -C(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), -S(O)2N(Rx4Rx4a), -S(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), -S(O)2Rx4, -S(O)Rx4, -N(Rx4)S(O)2N(Rx4aRx4b), -SRx4, -N(Rx4Rx4a), -NO2, -OC(O)Rx4, -N(Rx4)C(O)Rx4a, -N(Rx4)S(O)2Rx4a, -N(Rx4)S(O)Rx4a, -N(Rx4)C(O)ORx4a,
-N(Rx4)C(O)N(Rx4aRx4b), -OC(O)N(Rx4Rx4a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; each -Rx4, -Rx4a, -Rx4b is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, halogen, C1- 6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl; Even more preferably, the one or more further optional substituents are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of
halogen, -CN, -COORx1, -ORx1, -C(O)Rx1, -C(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -S(O)2N(Rx1Rx1a),
-S(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -S(O)2Rx1, -S(O)Rx1, -N(Rx1)S(O)2N(Rx1aRx1b), -SRx1, -N(Rx1Rx1a), -NO2, -OC(O)Rx1, -N(Rx1)C(O)Rx1a, -N(Rx1)S(O)2Rx1a, -N(Rx1)S(O)Rx1a, -N(Rx1)C(O)ORx1a, -N(Rx1)C(O)N(Rx1aRx1b), -OC(O)N(Rx1Rx1a), -T0, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl; wherein -T0, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -Rx2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T0-,
-C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(Rx3)-, -S(O)2N(Rx3)-, -S(O)N(Rx3)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-,
-N(Rx3)S(O)2N(Rx3a)-, -S-, -N(Rx3)-, -OC(ORx3)(Rx3a)-, -N(Rx3)C(O)N(Rx3a)-,
and -OC(O)N(Rx3)-; each -Rx1, -Rx1a, -Rx1b, -Rx2, -Rx3, -Rx3a is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, halogen, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl; each T0 is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T0 is independently optionally substituted with one or more -Rx2, which are the same or different. Preferably, a maximum of 6 -H atoms of an optionally substituted molecule are
independently replaced by a substituent, e.g.5 -H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, 4 -H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, 3 -H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, 2 -H atoms are independently replaced by a substituent, or 1 -H atom is replaced by a substituent. The term“interrupted” means that a moiety is inserted between two carbon atoms or– if the insertion is at one of the moiety’s ends– between a carbon and a hydrogen atom. As used herein, the term“C1-4 alkyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched alkyl moiety having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples of straight-chain or branched C1-4 alkyl are methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl and tert-butyl. When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the C1-4 alkyl, then examples for such C1-4 alkyl groups
are -CH2-, -CH2-CH2-, -CH(CH3)-, -CH2-CH2-CH2-, -CH(C2H5)-, -C(CH3)2-. Each hydrogen of a C1-4 alkyl carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above.
Optionally, a C1-4 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below. As used herein, the term“C1-6 alkyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched alkyl moiety having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples of straight-chain and branched C1-6 alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 2-methylbutyl, 2,2- dimethylpropyl, n-hexyl, 2-methylpentyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, 2,3- dimethylbutyl and 3,3-dimethylpropyl. When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the C1-6 alkyl group, then examples for such C1-6 alkyl groups are -CH2-, -CH2-CH2-, -CH(CH3)-, -CH2-CH2-CH2-, -CH(C2H5)- and -C(CH3)2-. Each hydrogen atom of a C1-6 carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, a C1-6 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below. Accordingly,“C1-10 alkyl”,“C1-20 alkyl” or“C1-50 alkyl” means an alkyl chain having 1 to 10, 1 to 20 or 1 to 50 carbon atoms, respectively, wherein each hydrogen atom of the C1-10, C1-20 or C1-50 carbon may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, a C1-10 or C1-50 alkyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below. As used herein, the term“C2-6 alkenyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon double bond having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples are -CH=CH2, -CH=CH- CH3, -CH2-CH=CH2, -CH=CHCH2-CH3 and -CH=CH-CH=CH2. When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the C2-6 alkenyl group, then an example for such C2-6 alkenyl is - CH=CH-. Each hydrogen atom of a C2-6 alkenyl moiety may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, a C2-6 alkenyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below. Accordingly, the term“C2-10 alkenyl”,“C2-20 alkenyl” or“C2-50 alkenyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon double bond having 2 to 10, 2 to 20 or 2 to 50 carbon atoms. Each hydrogen atom of a C2-10 alkenyl, C2-20 alkenyl or C2-50 alkenyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, a C2-10 alkenyl, C2-20 alkenyl or C2-50 alkenyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below. As used herein, the term“C2-6 alkynyl” alone or in combination means straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon triple bond having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. If present at the end of a molecule, examples are -C≡CH, -CH2-C≡CH, CH2-CH2-C≡CH and CH2-C≡C-CH3. When two moieties of a molecule are linked by the alkynyl group, then an example is -C≡C-. Each hydrogen atom of a C2-6 alkynyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, one or more double bond(s) may occur. Optionally, a C2-6 alkynyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below. Accordingly, as used herein, the term“C2-10 alkynyl”,“C2-20 alkynyl” and“C2-50 alkynyl” alone or in combination means a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon moiety comprising at least one carbon-carbon triple bond having 2 to 10, 2 to 20 or 2 to 50 carbon atoms, respectively. Each hydrogen atom of a C2-10 alkynyl, C2-20 alkynyl or C2-50 alkynyl group may optionally be replaced by a substituent as defined above. Optionally, one or more double bond(s) may occur. Optionally, a C2-10 alkynyl, C2-20 alkynyl or C2-50 alkynyl may be interrupted by one or more moieties as defined below. As mentioned above, a C1-4 alkyl, C1-6 alkyl, C1-10 alkyl, C1-20 alkyl, C1-50 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-10 alkenyl, C2-20 alkenyl, C2-50 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C2-10 alkynyl, C2-20 alkenyl or C2-50 alkynyl may optionally be interrupted by one or more of the following moieties:
O , S , N , N , S S , N N ,
R
,
Figure imgf000021_0001
wherein
dashed lines indicate attachment to the remainder of the moiety or reagent; and R and Ra are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl and hexyl. As used herein, the term "C3-10 cycloalkyl" means a cyclic alkyl chain having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, which may be saturated or unsaturated, e.g. cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl or cyclodecyl. Each hydrogen atom of a C3-10 cycloalkyl carbon may be replaced by a substituent as defined above. The term "C3-10 cycloalkyl" also includes bridged bicycles like norbornane or norbornene. The term“8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl” or“8- to 30-membered carbopolycycle” means a cyclic moiety of two or more rings with 8 to 30 ring atoms, where two neighboring rings share at least one ring atom and that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or un-saturated). Preferably a 8- to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl means a cyclic moiety of two, three, four or five rings, more preferably of two, three or four rings. As used herein, the term "3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl" or "3- to 10-membered heterocycle" means a ring with 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 ring atoms that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or un-saturated) wherein at least one ring atom up to 4 ring atoms are replaced by a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur (including -S(O)-, -S(O)2-), oxygen and nitrogen (including =N(O)-) and wherein the ring is linked to the rest of the molecule via a carbon or nitrogen atom. Examples for 3- to 10-membered heterocycles include but are not limited to aziridine, oxirane, thiirane, azirine, oxirene, thiirene, azetidine, oxetane, thietane, furan, thiophene, pyrrole, pyrroline, imidazole, imidazoline, pyrazole, pyrazoline, oxazole, oxazoline, isoxazole, isoxazoline, thiazole, thiazoline, isothiazole, isothiazoline, thiadiazole, thiadiazoline, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, pyrrolidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, oxazolidine, isoxazolidine, thiazolidine, isothiazolidine, thiadiazolidine, sulfolane, pyran, dihydropyran, tetrahydropyran, imidazolidine, pyridine, pyridazine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, piperazine, piperidine, morpholine, tetrazole, triazole, triazolidine, tetrazolidine, diazepane, azepine and homopiperazine. Each hydrogen atom of a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or 3- to 10-membered heterocyclic group may be replaced by a substituent as defined below. As used herein, the term "8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl" or "8- to 11-membered heterobicycle" means a heterocyclic moiety of two rings with 8 to 11 ring atoms, where at least one ring atom is shared by both rings and that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or un-saturated) wherein at least one ring atom up to 6 ring atoms are replaced by a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of sulfur (including -S(O)-, -S(O)2-), oxygen and nitrogen (including =N(O)-) and wherein the ring is linked to the rest of the molecule via a carbon or nitrogen atom. Examples for an 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle are indole, indoline, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzisoxazole, benzothiazole, benzisothiazole, benzimidazole, benzimidazoline, quinoline, quinazoline, dihydroquinazoline, quinoline, dihydroquinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, decahydroquinoline, isoquinoline, decahydroisoquinoline,
tetrahydroisoquinoline, dihydroisoquinoline, benzazepine, purine and pteridine. The term 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle also includes spiro structures of two rings like 1,4-dioxa-8- azaspiro[4.5]decane or bridged heterocycles like 8-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octane. Each hydrogen atom of an 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl or 8- to 11-membered heterobicycle carbon may be replaced by a substituent as defined below. Similary, the term“8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl” or“8- to 30-membered heteropolycycle” means a heterocyclic moiety of more than two rings with 8 to 30 ring atoms, preferably of three, four or five rings, where two neighboring rings share at least one ring atom and that may contain up to the maximum number of double bonds (aromatic or non-aromatic ring which is fully, partially or unsaturated), wherein at least one ring atom up to 10 ring atoms are replaced by a heteroatom selected from the group of sulfur (including −S(O)−,−S(O)2−), oxygen and nitrogen (including =N(O)−) and wherein the ring is linked to the rest of a molecule via a carbon or nitrogen atom. It is understood that that phrase“the pair−R1/−R1a is joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or a 8- to 11- membered heterobicyclyl” refers to a moiety having the following structure:
Figure imgf000023_0001
,
wherein <R is the C3-10 cycloalkyl or a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl. This applies analogously to the pairs−R2/−R3,−R5/−R5a and−R4/−R4a. It is understood that the phrase“the pair−R1/−R5 is joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring A” refers to a moiety having the following structure:
Figure imgf000024_0001
This applies analogously to the pairs−R1/−R2,−R1/−R3,−R1/−R5a,−R1a/−R2,−R1a/−R3, −R1a/−R5,−R1a/−R5a,−R2/−R5,−R2/−R5a,−R3/−R5,−R3/−R5a. As used herein, the term“terminal alkyne” means a moiety
Figure imgf000024_0002
As used herein, "halogen" means fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo. It is generally preferred that halogen is fluoro or chloro. In general, the term“comprise” or“comprising” also encompasses“consist of” or“consisting of”. In one embodiment−D of formula (I) is a primary or secondary amine-comprising biologically active moiety which is connected to -L1 through an amide linkage, i.e.−X1− is −CR5R5a−. −D of formula (I) is preferably selected from the group consisting of small molecule biologically active moiety, oligonucleotide moiety, peptide nucleic acid moiety, peptide moiety and protein moiety. More preferably -D of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of small molecule biologically active moiety, peptide moiety and protein moiety. In one preferred embodiment -D of formula (I) is a small molecule biologically active moiety. In another preferred embodiment -D of formula (I) is a peptide moiety. In another preferred embodiment -D of formula (I) is a protein moiety. In one preferred embodiment such protein moiety is a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody or fragment or fusion thereof. Another aspect of the present invention is a prodrug reagent comprising a conjugate L’-Q, wherein -Q is -OH or a leaving group; and -L’ comprises, preferably consists of, a linker moiety -L1 represented by formula (I’)
Figure imgf000025_0001
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -Q; -X1 is selected from the group consisting of -CR5R5a-, -O-, -NR5- and -S-; -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a are independently of other selected from -H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl, C1-6 alkynyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl, C1-6 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -R6, which are the same or different; and wherein C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl, C1-6 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-,
-C(O)N(R7)-, -S(O)2N(R7)-, -S(O)N(R7)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(R7)S(O)2N(R7a)-, -S-, -N(R7)-, -OC(OR7)(R7a)-, -N(R7)C(O)N(R7a)-, and -OC(O)N(R7)-; provided that the nitrogen marked with the asterisk is connected to -R2 through an SP3-hybridized carbon atom; each T is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered
heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more -R6, which are the same or different; each -R6, -R7, -R7a is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; =Y1 is selected from =O and =NR5; Optionally, one or more of the pairs -R1/-R1a, -R2/-R3, -R5/-R5a and -R4/-R4a are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10- membered heterocyclyl or a 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; Optionally, one or more of the
pairs -R1/-R2, -R1/-R3, -R1/-R5, -R1/-R5a, -R1a/-R2, -R1a/-R3, -R1a/-R5, -R1a/-R5a, -R2/-R5 , -R2/-R5a, -R3/-R5, -R3/-R5a are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring -A-; A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl; naphthyl; indenyl; indanyl;
tetralinyl; C3-10 cycloalkyl; 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl; and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl; wherein -L1 is substituted with one to five moieties -L2-Z and/or -L2’-Y, preferably -L1 is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2’-Y, and is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (I’) is not replaced by a substituent; wherein -L2- and -L2’- are independently of each other a single chemical bond or a spacer moiety; -Z is a carrier moiety; and -Y is a functional group which may optionally be present in its protected form. Preferably, -Q of formula (I’) is selected from the group consisting of chloride, bromide, fluoride, nitrophenoxy, imidazolyl, N-hydroxysuccinimidyl, N-hydroxybenzotriazolyl, N- hydroxyazobenzotriazolyl, pentafluorphenoxy, N-hydroxysulfosuccinimidyl,
diphenylphosphinomethanethiyl, 2-diphenylphosphinophenoxy, norbornene-N- hydroxysuccinimidyl, N-hydroxyphthalimide, pyridinoxy, nonafluoro tert-butyloxy and hexafluoro isopropyloxy. Preferably, -Y of formula (I’) is selected from the group consisting of thiol, maleimide, amine, hydroxyl, carboxylic acid and derivatives, carbonate and derivatives, carbamate and derivatives, isothiocyanate, disulfide, pyridyl disulfide, methylthiosulfonyl, vinylsulfone, aldehyde, ketone, haloacetyl, selenide, azide, -NH-NH2, -O-NH2, a terminal alkyne, a compound of formula (z’i)
Figure imgf000027_0001
wherein
-Y1-, -Y2- are independently of each other -C- or -N-,
-Ra, -Ra’, -Ra1, -Ra1’ are independently of each other -H or C1-6 alkyl,
ax1 is 0, if -Y2- is -N-; ax1 is 1, if -Y2- is -C-, optionally the pair -Ra/-Ra1 forms a chemical bond, if -Y2- is -C-, optionally, the pair -Ra’/-Ra1’ are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a ring A’, if -Y2- is -C-, A’ is cyclopropyl or phenyl; a compound of formula (z’ii)
Figure imgf000027_0002
wherein
-Y3- is -CH2- or -NH-; a compound of formula (z’iii)
Figure imgf000028_0001
wherein
−Ra2 and−Ra3 are−H,
−Ra2' and−Ra3' are–H or are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 5-membered heterocyclyl ring A1', and
Figure imgf000028_0003
indicates a single or double bond; a compound of formula (z’v)
Figure imgf000028_0002
wherein
-Ra4, -Ra4’, -Ra5, -Ra5’ are -H, optionally the pair -Ra4/-Ra5 forms a chemical bond, optionally, the pair -Ra4’/-Ra5’ are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring A2’, A2’ is 5-membered heterocyclyl; a compound of formula (z’vi)
Figure imgf000029_0001
wherein
-Ra6, -Ra6’ are either both C1-6 alkyl or one of -Ra6, -Ra6’ is -H and the other one is selected from C a7’
1-6 alkyl, -COORa7; -CONHR , and -CH2ORa7’’,
-Ra7, -Ra7’, -Ra7’’ are independently of each other -H or C1-4 alkyl; a compound of formula (z’vii)
Figure imgf000029_0002
a compound of formula (z’viii)
Figure imgf000029_0003
wherein
-Ra8, -Ra8‘, -Ra8‘‘are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H and C1-4 alkyl; a compound of formula (z’ix)
Figure imgf000029_0004
wherein -Ra9 is -H or C1-4 alkyl; a compound of formula (z’x)
Figure imgf000030_0001
wherein
-Ra9 is selected from–COORa11, -CONHRa11, and
Figure imgf000030_0002
,
wherein
-Y4- is -C- or–N-,
-Ra12 is selected from the group consisting
of -H, -COORa13, -CONRa13Ra13’, -CH2NRa13Ra13’, and -NRa13CORa13’,
-Ra13, -Ra13’ are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H and C1-4 alkyl,
-Aa3 is selected from -H, methyl, tert-butyl, -CF3, -COOR,
Figure imgf000030_0003
wherein
each -Y5-, -Y6-, -Y7-, -Y8- is independently of each other -C- or -N-, provided that no more than 3 of -Y5-, -Y6-, -Y7-, -Y8- are -N-,
each of -Y9-, -Y10-, -Y11-, -Y12-, -Y13- is either -C-, -N-, -S- or -O-, provided that no more than 4 of -Y9-, -Y10-, -Y11-, -Y12-, -Y13- are -N-, -S-, or -O-; a compound of formula (z’xi)
Figure imgf000031_0001
a compound of formula (z’xii)
Figure imgf000031_0002
wherein
-Ra19, -Ra18’are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z’xiii)
Figure imgf000031_0003
wherein
-Ra20 is selected from the group consisting of -H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z’xiv)
Figure imgf000031_0004
wherein
Ar is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl,
-Y14 is selected from halogen, -Ra22, -Ra23, -Ra23’ are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z’xv)
Figure imgf000032_0001
Ar is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl,
-Ra24, -Ra24’, -Ra24’’, -Ra24’’’ are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10- membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z’xvi)
Figure imgf000032_0002
wherein
-Ra25 is selected from the group consisting of -H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z’xvii)
Figure imgf000032_0003
wherein
-Ra27, -Ra27’ are independently of each other -H or C1-6 alkyl; a compound of formula (z’xviii)
Figure imgf000033_0001
a compound of formula (z’xix) (z’xix),
wherein
-PPh2 represents a group having the following formula
Figure imgf000033_0002
,
wherein the dashed line indicates attachment to the rest of the moiety of formula (z’xix),
-Ra12 is selected from
Figure imgf000033_0003
,
wherein
the unmarked dashed line indicates attachment to the rest of the moiety of formula (z’xix),
the dashed line with the asterisk indicates attachment to -L2’-,
q is 1 or 2, and
-Y14- is -O- or -S-; and a compound of formula (z’xx)
Figure imgf000034_0001
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-; wherein the moieties of formula (z’i), (z’ii), (z’iii), (z’iv), (z’v), (z’vi), (z’vii), (z’viii), (z’ix), (z’x), (z’xi), (z’xii), (z’xiii), (z’xiv), (z’xv), (z’xvi), (z’xvii) and (z’xviii) are substituted with a moiety -L2’- and are optionally further substituted. Preferably, -Y1- of formula (z’i) is -C-. Preferably, -Ra, -Ra’, -Ra1, -Ra1’ of formula (z’i) are -H. Preferred embodiments of formula (z’i) are selected from the group consisting of
,
Figure imgf000034_0002
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-, and
-Ra, -Ra1, -Ra1’ are used as defined in formula (z’i). Preferred embodiments of formula (z’ii) are
, and
Figure imgf000035_0001
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-. Preferred embodiments of formula (z’iii) are
Figure imgf000035_0002
; wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-. Preferred embodiments of formula (z’iv) are
Figure imgf000035_0003
; wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-. A preferred embodiment of formula (z’v) is
Figure imgf000036_0001
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-. Preferred embodiments of formula (z’vi) are
Figure imgf000036_0002
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-. A preferred embodiments of formula (z’vii) is
Figure imgf000036_0003
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-. Preferred embodiments of formula (z’viii) are
Figure imgf000037_0002
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-.
A preferred embodiment of formula (z’ix) is
Figure imgf000037_0003
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment t
Figure imgf000037_0004
10 P f d bdi f A3 f f l (’)
Figure imgf000037_0001
1 ( ) Preferred embodiments of the moiety
of formula (z’x) are
Figure imgf000038_0001
, wherein
the unmarked dashed line indicates attachment to the remainder of (z’x) and the dashed line marked with the asterisk indicates attachment to -L2’-. A preferred embodiment of formula (z’xii) is
Figure imgf000038_0002
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-, and
-Ra19 is H, methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl. A preferred embodiment of formula (z’xiii) is
Figure imgf000038_0003
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-. A preferred embodiment of formula (z’xiv) is
Figure imgf000038_0004
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-,
Ar is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl, and -Y14 is halogen. A preferred embodiment of formula (z’xv) is
Figure imgf000039_0001
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-,
Ar is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; and
-Ra24’, -Ra24’’, -Ra24’’’ are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl. A preferred embodiment of formula (z’xvi) is
Figure imgf000039_0003
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-. A preferred embodiment of formula (z’xvii) is
Figure imgf000039_0002
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -L2’-. In a preferred embodiment -X1- of formula (I) or (I’) is -CR5R5a-. In a preferred embodiment -R4a of formula (I) or (I’) is -H which is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. In a preferred embodiment =Y1 of formula (I) or (I’) is =O. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a are independently of other selected from -H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl, C1-6 alkynyl. In a preferred embodiment -R1 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl and C1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R1 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C1-6 alkyl. Even more preferably, -R1 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl. In a preferred embodiment -R1a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl and C1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R1a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C1-6 alkyl. Even more preferably, -R1a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl. In a preferred embodiment -R2 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl and C1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R2 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C1-6 alkyl. Even more preferably, -R2 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl. In a preferred embodiment -R3 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl and C1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R3 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C1-6 alkyl. Even more preferably, -R3 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl. In a preferred embodiment -R4 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl and C1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R4 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C1-6 alkyl. Even more preferably, -R4 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl. In a preferred embodiment -R5 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl and C1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R5 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C1-6 alkyl. Even more preferably, -R5 of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl. In a preferred embodiment -R5a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkenyl and C1-6 alkynyl; more preferably, -R5a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H and C1-6 alkyl. Even more preferably, -R5a of formula (I) or (I’) is selected from -H, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylpropyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, 3-methybutyl, 1-methylbutyl and 1-ethylpropyl.
Figure imgf000041_0001
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to the primary or secondary amine of the biologically active moiety; and
-R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a are used as defined in formula (I). In one embodiment -R5 and -R5a of formula (Ia) are both -H. In one embodiment -R1 and -R1a of formula (Ia) are both -H. In one embodiment -R2 of formula (Ia) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R3 of formula (Ia) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R4 of formula (Ia) is -CH3. In another embodiment -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ia) are both -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (Ia) are -H. In one embodiment -R1, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R1a is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (Ia) are -H and–R2 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R3 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R4 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a and -R5a of formula (Ia) are -H and–R5 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R5 and -R5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R3, -R5 and -R5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R2, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R5 and -R5a of formula (Ia) are -H and–R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (Ia) are -H and -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. A preferred moiety -L1 of formula (I’) is of formula (I’a):
Figure imgf000043_0001
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -Q; and
-R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a are used as defined in formula (I’). In a preferred embodiment, -R5 and -R5a of formula (I’a) are both -H. In one embodiment -R1 and -R1a of formula (I’a) are both -H. In one embodiment -R2 of formula (I’a) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R3 of formula (I’a) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R4 of formula (I’a) is -CH3. In another embodiment -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ia) are both -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (I’a) are -H. In one embodiment -R1, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R1a is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (I’a) are -H and–R2 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R4, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R3 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R4 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a and -R5a of formula (I’a) are -H and–R5 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R5 and -R5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R3, -R5 and -R5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R2, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R5 and -R5a of formula (I’a) are -H and–R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R5 and -R5a of formula (I’a) are -H and -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. Another preferred moiety -L1 of formula (I) is of formula (Ib):
Figure imgf000044_0001
(Ib),
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to the primary or secondary amine of the biologically active moiety; and
-R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a are used as defined in formula (I). In one embodiment -R1 and -R1a of formula (Ib) are both -H. In one embodiment -R2 of formula (Ib) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R3 of formula (Ib) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R4 of formula (Ib) is -CH3. In another embodiment -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ib) are both -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ib) are -H. In one embodiment -R1, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ib) are -H and -R1a is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ib) are -H and -R2 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ib) are -H and -R3 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3 and -R4a of formula (Ib) are -H and -R4 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2 and -R3 of formula (Ib) are -H and -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a and -R3 of formula (Ib) are -H and -R2, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a and -R2 of formula (Ib) are -H and -R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1 and -R1a of formula (Ib) are -H and -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. A preferred moiety -L1 of formula (I’) is of formula (I’b):
Figure imgf000045_0001
(I’b),
wherein the dashed line indicates attachment to -Q; and
-R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a are used as defined in formula (I’). In one embodiment -R1 and -R1a of formula (I’b) are both -H. In one embodiment -R2 of formula (I’b) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R3 of formula (I’b) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R4 of formula (I’b) is -CH3. In another embodiment -R4 and -R4a of formula (I’b) are both -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (I’b) are -H. In one embodiment -R1, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (I’b) are -H and -R1a is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (I’b) are -H and -R2 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R4 and -R4a of formula (I’b) are -H and -R3 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3 and -R4a of formula (I’b) are -H and -R4 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2 and -R3 of formula (I’b) are -H and -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a and -R3 of formula (I’b) are -H and -R2, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a and -R2 of formula (I’b) are -H and -R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1 and -R1a of formula (I’b) are -H and -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. Another preferred moiety -L1 of formula (I) is of formula (Ic):
Figure imgf000047_0001
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to the primary or secondary amine of the biologically active moiety; and
-R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a are used as defined in formula (I). In one embodiment -R1 and -R1a of formula (Ic) are both -H. In one embodiment -R2 of formula (Ic) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R3 of formula (Ic) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R4 of formula (Ic) is -CH3. In another embodiment -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ic) are both -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ic) are -H. In one embodiment -R1, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ic) are -H and -R1a is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ic) are -H and -R2 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R4 and -R4a of formula (Ic) are -H and -R3 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3 and -R4a of formula (Ic) are -H and -R4 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2 and -R3 of formula (Ic) are -H and -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a and -R3 of formula (Ic) are -H and -R2, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a and -R2 of formula (Ic) are -H and -R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1 and -R1a of formula (Ic) are -H and -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. A preferred moiety -L1 of formula (I’) is of formula (I’c):
Figure imgf000048_0001
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to -Q; and
-R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a are used as defined in formula (I’). In one embodiment -R1 and -R1a of formula (I’c) are both -H. In one embodiment -R2 of formula (I’c) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R3 of formula (I’c) is -CH3. In one embodiment -R4 of formula (I’c) is -CH3. In another embodiment -R4 and -R4a of formula (I’c) are both -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (I’c) are -H. In one embodiment -R1, -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (I’c) are -H and -R1a is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R3, -R4 and -R4a of formula (I’c) are -H and -R2 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R4 and -R4a of formula (I’c) are -H and -R3 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3 and -R4a of formula (I’c) are -H and -R4 is -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a, -R2 and -R3 of formula (I’c) are -H and -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a and -R3 of formula (I’c) are -H and -R2, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1, -R1a and -R2 of formula (I’c) are -H and -R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. In one embodiment -R1 and -R1a of formula (I’c) are -H and -R2, -R3, -R4 and -R4a are -CH3. -Z is a carrier. Preferably, -Z comprises a C8-18 alkyl group or a polymer with a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa. In one embodiment -Z comprises a C8-18 alkyl group. In another embodiment -Z comprises a polymer with a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa. Preferably, a polymeric carrier -Z comprises at least one of the polymers selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides),
poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones),
poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl- oxazolines), poly(hydroxymethacrylates), poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamides), poly(hydroxypropyl methacrylates), poly(hydroxypropyloxazolines), poly(iminocarbonates), poly(lactic acids), poly(lactic-co-glycolic acids), poly(methacrylamides),
poly(methacrylates), poly(methyloxazolines), poly(organophosphazenes), poly(ortho esters), poly(oxazolines), poly(propylene glycols), poly(siloxanes), poly(urethanes), poly(vinyl alcohols), poly(vinyl amines), poly(vinylmethylethers), poly(vinylpyrrolidones), silicones, celluloses, carbomethyl celluloses, hydroxypropyl methylcelluloses, chitins, chitosans, dextrans, dextrins, gelatins, hyaluronic acids and derivatives, functionalized hyaluronic acids, mannans, pectins, rhamnogalacturonans, starches, hydroxyalkyl starches, hydroxyethyl starches and other carbohydrate-based polymers, xylans, and copolymers thereof. In a preferred embodiment the poly(amide) is a peptide or protein. In a preferred embodiment -Z comprises a protein. Even more preferably, -Z comprises a protein selected from the group consisting of albumin, transferrin, and immunoglobulin. In another preferred embodiment -Z comprises a protein carrier as disclosed in
WO2013/024049A1, which is hereby incorporated by reference. In another preferred embodiment -Z comprises a PEG-based polymer comprising at last 10% PEG, such as at least 20 % PEG, at least 30 % PEG, at least 40 % PEG or at least 50% PEG; or a hyaluronic acid-based polymer comprising at least 10 % hyaluronic acid, such as at least 20 % hyaluronic acid, at least 30% hyaluronic acid, at least 40 % hyaluronic acid or at least 50 % hyaluronic acid. In one embodiment -Z comprises a water-soluble polymer with a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa. Preferably, -Z comprises a linear, branched or dendritic PEG-based polymer comprising at least 10 % PEG (such as at least 20 % PEG, at least 30% PEG, at least 40 % PEG or at least 50 % PEG) with a molecular weight from 2,000 Da to 150,000 Da. Even more preferably -Z comprises a PEG-based carrier as disclosed in WO2103/024047 A1 and WO2013/024047 A1, which are hereby incorporated by reference. A preferred water-soluble PEG-based carrier -Z is a multi-arm PEG derivative as, for instance, detailed in the products list of JenKem Technology (USA), such as a 4-arm-PEG derivative, in particular a 4-arm-PEG comprising a pentaerythritol core, an 8-arm-PEG derivative comprising a hexaglycerin core, and an 8-arm-PEG derivative comprising a tripentaerythritol core. More preferably, such water-soluble PEG-based carrier -Z comprises a moiety selected from: a 4-arm PEG Amine comprising a pentaerythritol core:
Figure imgf000051_0001
4
with n ranging from 20 to 500; an 8-arm PEG Amine comprising a hexaglycerin core:
Figure imgf000051_0002
8
with n ranging from 20 to 500; and
-R = hexaglycerin or tripentaerythritol core structure; and a 6-arm PEG Amine comprising a sorbitol or dipentaerythritol core:
Figure imgf000051_0003
6 with n ranging from 20 to 500; and
-R = comprising a sorbitol or dipentaerythritol core; wherein dashed lines indicate attachment to the rest of the prodrug. In another embodiment -Z comprises a water-insoluble polymer. Preferably, -Z comprises a water-insoluble hydrogel, more preferably a PEG-based hydrogel comprising at least 10 % PEG (such as at least 20 % PEG, at least 30% PEG, at least 40 % PEG or at least 50 % PEG) or a hyaluronic acid-based hydrogel comprising at least 10 % hyaluronic acid (such as at least 20 % hyaluronic acid, at least 30% hyaluronic acid, at least 40 % hyaluronic acid or at least 50 % hyaluronic acid) and most preferably -Z comprises a hydrogel as disclosed in WO2006/003014 A2, WO2011/012715 A1 or WO2014/056926 A1, which are hereby incorporated by reference. In an even more preferred embodiment -Z comprises a hydrogel obtained from a process for the preparation of a hydrogel comprising the steps of: (a) providing a mixture comprising
(a-i) at least one backbone reagent, wherein the at least one backbone reagent has a molecular weight ranging from 1 to 100 kDa, and comprises at least three functional groups Ax0, wherein each Ax0 is a maleimide, amine (-NH2 or -NH-), hydroxyl (-OH), thiol (-SH), carboxyl (-COOH) or activated carboxyl (-COY1, wherein Y1 is selected from formulas (f-i) to (f-vii):
Figure imgf000052_0001
wherein
the dashed lines indicate attachment to the rest of the molecule,
b is 1, 2, 3 or 4,
XH is Cl, Br, I, or F); (a-ii) at least one crosslinker reagent, wherein the at least one crosslinker reagent has a molecular weight ranging from 0.2 to 40 kDa and comprises at least two functional end groups selected from the group consisting of activated ester groups, activated carbamate groups, activated carbonate groups, activated thiocarbonate groups, amine groups and thiol groups; in a weight ratio of the at least one backbone reagent to the at least one crosslinker reagent ranging from 1:99 to 99:1 and wherein the molar ratio of Ax0 to functional end groups is >1; (b) polymerizing the mixture of step (a) in a suspension polymerization to a hydrogel. Preferably, the crosslinker reagent of step (a-ii) comprises at least one reversible linkage. Even more preferably, such at least one reversible linkage is an ester and/or carbonate. The mixture of step (a) comprises a first solvent and at least a second solvent. Said first solvent is preferably selected from the group comprising dichloromethane, chloroform, tetrahydrofuran, ethyl acetate, dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, propylene carbonate, N-methylpyrrolidone, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol and water and mixtures thereof. The at least one backbone reagent and at least one crosslinker reagent are dissolved in the first solvent, i.e. the disperse phase of the suspension polymerization. In one embodiment the backbone reagent and the crosslinker reagent are dissolved separately, i.e. in different containers, using either the same or different solvent and preferably using the same solvent for both reagents. In another embodiment, the backbone reagent and the crosslinker reagent are dissolved together, i.e. in the same container and using the same solvent. A suitable solvent for the backbone reagent is an organic solvent. Preferably, the solvent is selected from the group consisting of dichloromethane, chloroform, tetrahydrofuran, ethyl acetate, dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, propylene carbonate, N- methylpyrrolidone, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol and water and mixtures thereof. More preferably, the backbone reagent is dissolved in a solvent selected from the group comprising acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, methanol or mixtures thereof. Most preferably, the backbone reagent is dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide. In one embodiment the backbone reagent is dissolved in the solvent in a concentration ranging from 1 to 300 mg/ml, more preferably from 5 to 60 mg/ml and most preferably from 10 to 40 mg/ml. A suitable solvent for the crosslinker reagent is an organic solvent. Preferably, the solvent is selected from the group comprising dichloromethane, chloroform, tetrahydrofuran, ethyl acetate, dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, propylene carbonate, N- methylpyrrolidone, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, water or mixtures thereof. More preferably, the crosslinker reagent is dissolved in a solvent selected from the group comprising dimethylformamide, acetonitrile, dimethyl sulfoxide, methanol or mixtures thereof. Most preferably, the crosslinker reagent is dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide. In one embodiment the crosslinker reagent is dissolved in the solvent in a concentration ranging from 5 to 500 mg/ml, more preferably from 25 to 300 mg/ml and most preferably from 50 to 200 mg/ml. The at least one backbone reagent and the at least one crosslinker reagent are mixed in a weight ratio ranging from 1:99 to 99:1, e.g. in a ratio ranging from 2:98 to 90:10, in a weight ratio ranging from 3:97 to 88:12, in a weight ratio ranging from 3:96 to 85:15, in a weight ratio ranging from 2:98 to 90:10 and in a weight ratio ranging from 5:95 to 80:20; particularly preferred in a weight ratio from 5:95 to 80:20, wherein the first number refers to the backbone reagent and the second number to the crosslinker reagent. Preferably, the ratios are selected such that the mixture of step (a) comprises a molar excess of funcational groups Ax0 from the backbone reagent compared to the activated functional end groups of the crosslinker reagent. Consequently, the hydrogel resulting from the process has free functional groups Ax0 which can be used to couple other moieties to the hydrogel, such as spacers, and/or reversible prodrug linker moieties L1. The at least one second solvent, i.e. the continuous phase of the suspension polymerization, is preferably an organic solvent, more preferably an organic solvent selected from the group comprising linear, branched or cyclic C5-30 alkanes; linear, branched or cyclic C5-30 alkenes; linear, branched or cyclic C5-30 alkynes; linear or cyclic poly(dimethylsiloxanes); aromatic C6-20 hydrocarbons; and mixtures thereof. Even more preferably, the at least second solvent is selected from the group comprising linear, branched or cyclic C5-16 alkanes; toluene; xylene; mesitylene; hexamethyldisiloxane; or mixtures thereof. Most preferably, the at least second solvent selected from the group comprising linear C7-11 alkanes, such as heptane, octane, nonane, decane and undecane. Preferably, the mixture of step (a) further comprises a detergent. Preferred detergents are Cithrol DPHS, Hypermer 70A, Hypermer B246, Hypermer 1599A, Hypermer 2296, and Hypermer 1083. Preferably, the detergent has a concentration of 0.1 g to 100 g per 1 L total mixture, i.e. disperse phase and continuous phase together. More preferably, the detergent has a concentration of 0.5 g to 10 g per 1 L total mixture, and most preferably, the detergent has a concentration of 0.5 g to 5 g per 1 L total mixture. Preferably, the mixture of step (a) is an emulsion. The polymerization in step (b) is initiated by adding a base. Preferably, the base is a non- nucleophilic base soluble in alkanes, more preferably the base is selected from N,N,N',N'- tetramethylethylene diamine (TMEDA), 1,4-dimethylpiperazine, 4-methylmorpholine, 4- ethylmorpholine, 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, 1,1,4,7,10,10- hexamethyltriethylenetetramine, 1,4,7-trimethyl-1,4,7-triazacyclononane, tris[2- (dimethylamino)ethyl]amine, triethylamine, DIPEA, trimethylamine, N,N- dimethylethylamine, N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyl-1,6-hexanediamine, N,N,N′,N′′,N′′- pentamethyldiethylenetriamine, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene, 1,5- diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene, and hexamethylenetetramine. Even more preferably, the base is selected from TMEDA, 1,4-dimethylpiperazine, 4-methylmorpholine, 4-ethylmorpholine, 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, 1,1,4,7,10,10-hexamethyltriethylenetetramine, 1,4,7-trimethyl- 1,4,7-triazacyclononane, tris[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]amine, 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7- ene, 1,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene, and hexamethylenetetramine. Most preferably, the base is TMEDA. The base is added to the mixture of step (a) in an amount of 1 to 500 equivalents per activated functional end group in the mixture, preferably in an amount of 5 to 50 equivalents, more preferably in an amount of 5 to 25 equivalents and most preferably in an amount of 10 equivalents. In process step (b), the polymerization of the hydrogel is a condensation reaction, which preferably occurs under continuous stirring of the mixture of step (a). Preferably, the tip speed (tip speed = π × stirrer rotational speed × stirrer diameter) ranges from 0.2 to 10 meter per second (m/s), more preferably from 0.5 to 4 m/s and most preferably from 1 to 2 m/s. In a preferred embodiment of step (b), the polymerization reaction is carried out in a cylindrical vessel equipped with baffles. The diameter to height ratio of the vessel may range from 4:1 to 1:2, more preferably the diameter to height ratio of the vessel ranges from 2:1 to 1:1. Preferably, the reaction vessel is equipped with an axial flow stirrer selected from the group comprising pitched blade stirrer, marine type propeller, or Lightnin A-310. More preferably, the stirrer is a pitched blade stirrer. Step (b) can be performed in a broad temperature range, preferably at a temperature from -10°C to 100 C°, more preferably at a temperature of 0°C to 80°C, even more preferably at a temperature of 10°C to 50 °C and most preferably at ambient temperature.“Ambient temperature” refers to the temperature present in a typical laboratory environment and preferably means a temperature ranging from 17 to 25°C. Preferably, the hydrogel obtained from the polymerization is a shaped article, such as a coating, mesh, stent, nanoparticle or a microparticle. More preferably, the hydrogel is in the form of microparticular beads having a diameter from 1 to 500 micrometer, more preferably with a diameter from 10 to 300 micrometer, even more preferably with a diameter from 20 and 150 micrometer and most preferably with a diameter from 30 to 130 micrometer. The afore-mentioned diameters are measured when the hydrogel microparticles are fully hydrated in water. In one embodiment the process for the preparation of a hydrogel further comprises the step of:
(c) working-up the hydrogel. Step (c) comprises one or more of the following step(s):
(c1) removing excess liquid from the polymerization reaction,
(c2) washing the hydrogel to remove solvents used during polymerization,
(c3) transferring the hydrogel into a buffer solution,
(c4) size fractionating/sieving of the hydrogel,
(c5) transferring the hydrogel into a container,
(c6) drying the hydrogel,
(c7) transferring the hydrogel into a specific solvent suitable for sterilization, and (c8) sterilizing the hydrogel, preferably by gamma radiation Preferably, step (c) comprises all of the following steps
(c1) removing excess liquid from the polymerization reaction,
(c2) washing the hydrogel to remove solvents used during polymerization,
(c3) transferring the hydrogel into a buffer solution,
(c4) size fractionating/sieving of the hydrogel,
(c5) transferring the hydrogel into a container,
(c7) transferring the hydrogel into a specific solvent suitable for sterilization, and (c8) sterilizing the hydrogel, preferably by gamma radiation. The at least one backbone reagent has a molecular weight ranging from 1 to 100 kDa, preferably from 2 to 50 kDa, more preferably from 5 and 30 kDa, even more preferably from 5 to 25 kDa and most preferably from 5 to 15 kDa. Preferably, the backbone reagent is PEG-based comprising at least 10% PEG, more preferably comprising at least 20% PEG, even more preferably comprising at least 30% PEG and most preferably comprising at least 40% PEG. In one embodiment the backbone reagent of step (a-i) is present in the form of its acidic salt, preferably in the form of an acid addition salt. Suitable acid addition salts are formed from acids which form non-toxic salts. Examples include but are not limited to the acetate, aspartate, benzoate, besylate, bicarbonate, carbonate, bisulphate, sulphate, borate, camsylate, citrate, edisylate, esylate, formate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glucuronate,
hexafluorophosphate, hibenzate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, isethionate, lactate, malate, maleate, malonate, mesylate, methylsulphate, naphthylate, nicotinate, nitrate, orotate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, phosphate, hydrogen phosphate, dihydrogen phosphate, sacharate, stearate, succinate, tartrate and tosylate. Particularly preferred, the backbone reagent is present in the form of its hydrochloride salt. In one embodiment, the at least one backbone reagent is selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (aI) B(– (A0)x1– (SP)x2– A1– P– A2– Hyp1)x (aI), wherein
B is a branching core,
SP is a spacer moiety selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl,
P is a PEG-based polymeric chain comprising at least 80% PEG, preferably at least 85% PEG, more preferably at least 90% PEG and most preferably at least 95% PEG,
Hyp1 is a moiety comprising an amine (-NH2 and/or -NH-) or a polyamine
comprising at least two amines (-NH2 and/or -NH-),
x is an integer from 3 to 16,
x1, x2 are independently of each other 0 or 1, provided that x1 is 0, if x2 is 0, A0, A1, A2 are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000059_0001
wherein R1 and R1a are independently of each other selected from H and C1-6 alkyl; a compound of formula (aII) Hyp2– A3– P– A4– Hyp3 (aII), wherein
P is defined as above in the compound of formula (aI),
Hyp2, Hyp3 are independently of each other a polyamine comprising at least two amines (-NH2 and/or -NH-), and
A3 and A4 are independently selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000060_0001
wherein R1 and R1a are independently of each other selected from H and C1-6 alkyl; a compound of formula (aIII) P1– A5– Hyp4 (aIII), wherein
P1 is a PEG-based polymeric chain comprising at least 80% PEG,
preferably at least 85% PEG, more preferably at least 90% PEG and most preferably at least 95% PEG,
Hyp4 is a polyamine comprising at least three amines (-NH2 and/or -NH), and
A5 is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000061_0001
wherein R1 and R1a are independently of each other selected from H and C1-6 alkyl; and a compound of formula (aIV),
Figure imgf000061_0003
wherein
Hyp5 is a polyamine comprising at least three amines (-NH2 and/or -NH), and A6 is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000061_0002
wherein R1 and R1a are independently of each other selected from H and C1- 6 alkyl; and
T1 is selected from the group consisting of C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl and C2-50 alkynyl, which fragment is optionally interrupted by one or more group(s) selected from -NH-, -N(C1-4 alkyl)-, -O-, -S-, -C(O)-, -C(O)NH- , -C(O)N(C1-4 alkyl)-, -O-C(O)-, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, phenyl and naphthyl. In the following sections the term“Hypx” refers to Hyp1, Hyp2, Hyp3, Hyp4 and Hyp5 collectively. Preferably, the backbone reagent is a compound of formula (aI), (aII) or (aIII), more preferably the backbone reagent is a compound of formula (aI) or (aIII), and most preferably the backbone reagent is a compound of formula (aI). In a preferred embodiment, in a compound of formula (aI), x is 4, 6 or 8. Preferably, in a compound of formula (aI) x is 4 or 8, most preferably, x is 4. In a preferred embodiment in the compounds of the formulas (aI) to (aIV), A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 and A6 are selected from the group comprising .
Figure imgf000062_0001
Preferably, in a compound of formula (aI) A0 is
Figure imgf000062_0002
Preferably, in a compound of formula (aI) A1 is
Figure imgf000063_0005
Preferably, in a compound of formula (aI) A2 is
Figure imgf000063_0001
Preferably, in a compound of formula (aII) A3 is
Figure imgf000063_0006
and A4 is
Figure imgf000063_0002
Preferably, in a compound of formula (aIII) A5 is
Figure imgf000063_0003
Preferably, in a compound of formula (aIV) A6 is .
Figure imgf000063_0004
Preferably, in a compound of formula (aIV), T1 is selected from H and C1-6 alkyl. In one embodiment, in a compound of formula (aI), the branching core B is selected from the following structures:
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000065_0001
wherein
dashed lines indicate attachment to A0 or, if x1 and x2 are both 0, to A1,
t is 1 or 2; preferably t is 1,
v is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ,6 ,7 ,8 , 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14; preferably, v is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6;
more preferably, v is 2, 4 or 6; most preferably, v is 2. In a preferred embodiment, B has a structure of formula (a-i), (a-ii), (a-iii), (a-iv), (a-v), (a- vi), (a-vii), (a-viii), (a-ix), (a-x), (a-xiv), (a-xv) or (a-xvi). More preferably, B has a structure of formula (a-iii), (a-iv), (a-v), (a-vi), (a-vii), (a-viii), (a-ix), (a-x) or (a-iv). Most preferably, B has a structure of formula (a-xiv). A preferred embodiment is a combination of B and A0, or, if x1 and x2 are both 0 a preferred combination of B and A1, which is selected from the following structures:
Figure imgf000065_0002
Figure imgf000066_0001
wherein
dashed lines indicate attachment to SP or, if x1 and x2 are both 0, to P. More preferably, the combination of B and A0 or, if x1 and x2 are both 0, the combination of B and A1, has a structure of formula of formula (b-i), (b-iv), (b-vi) or (b-viii) and most preferably has a structure of formula of formula (b-i). In one embodiment, x1 and x2 of formula (aI) are 0. In one embodiment, the PEG-based polymeric chain P has a molecular weight from 0.3 kDa to 40 kDa; e.g. from 0.4 to 35 kDa, from 0.6 to 38 kDA, from 0.8 to 30 kDa, from 1 to 25 kDa, from 1 to 15 kDa or from 1 to 10 kDa. Most preferably P has a molecular weight from 1 to 10 kDa. In one embodiment, the PEG-based polymeric chain P1 has a molecular weight from 0.3 kDa to 40 kDa; e.g. from 0.4 to 35 kDa, from 0.6 to 38 kDA, from 0.8 to 30 kDa, from 1 to 25 kDa, from 1 to 15 kDa or from 1 to 10 kDa. Most preferably P1 has a molecular weight from 1 to 10 kDa. In one embodiment, in the compounds of formulas (aI) or (aII), P has the structure of formula (c-i):
Figure imgf000067_0001
wherein n ranges from 6 to 900, more preferably n ranges from 20 to 700 and most preferably n ranges from 20 to 250. In one embodiment, in the compounds of formulas (aIII), P1 has the structure of formula (c- ii):
Figure imgf000067_0002
(c-ii),
wherein
n ranges from 6 to 900, more preferably n ranges from 20 to 700 and most preferably n ranges from 20 to 250;
T0 is selected from the group comprising C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl, which is optionally interrupted by one or more group(s) selected from -NH-, -N(C1-4 alkyl)-, -O-, -S-, -C(O)-, -C(O)NH-, -C(O)N(C1-4 alkyl)-, -O-C(O)-, -S(O)- and -S(O)2-. In one embodiment, in the compounds of formulas (aI) to (aIV), the moiety Hypx is a polyamine and preferably comprises in bound form and, where applicable, in R- and/or S- configuration a moiety of the formulas (d-i), (d-ii), (d-iii) and/or (d-vi):
Figure imgf000067_0003
Figure imgf000068_0001
wherein
z1, z2, z3, z4, z5, z6 are independently of each other 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8. More preferably, Hypx comprises in bound form and in R- and/or S-configuration lysine, ornithine, diaminoproprionic acid and/or diaminobutyric acid. Most preferably, Hypx comprises in bound form and in R- and/or S-configuration lysine. Hypx has a molecular weight from 40 Da to 30 kDa, preferably from 0.3 kDa to 25 kDa, more preferably from 0.5 kDa to 20 kDa, even more preferably from 1 kDa to 20 kDa and most preferably from 2 kDa to 15 kDa. Hypx is preferably selected from the group consisting of - a moiety of formula (e-i)
Figure imgf000068_0002
wherein
p1 is an integer from 1 to 5, preferably p1 is 4, and
the dashed line indicates attachment to A2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI) and to A3 or A4 if the backbone reagent has the structure of formula (aII); - a moiety of formula (e-ii)
Figure imgf000069_0001
wherein
p2, p3 and p4 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 1 to 5, preferably p2, p3 and p4 are 4, and
the dashed line indicates attachment to A2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A3 or A4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); - a moiety of formula (e-iii)
Figure imgf000069_0002
wherein p5 to p11 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 1 to 5, preferably p5 to p11 are 4, and
the dashed line indicates attachment to A2 if the backbone reagent is of formula (aI), to A3 or A4 if the backbone reagent is of formula (aII), to A5 if the backbone reagent is of formula (aIII) and to A6 if the backbone reagent is of formula (aIV); - a moiety of formula (e-iv)
Figure imgf000070_0001
wherein
p12 to p26 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 1 to 5, preferably p12 to p26 are 4, and the dashed line indicates attachment to A2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A3 or A4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); -
Figure imgf000071_0001
wherein
p27 and p28 are identical or different and each is independently of the other an integer from 1 to 5, preferably p27 and p28 are 4,
q is an integer from 1 to 8, preferably q is 2 or 6 and most preferably 1 is
6, and
the dashed line indicates attachment to A2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A3 or A4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); - a moiety of formula (e-vi)
Figure imgf000071_0002
wherein
p29 and p30 are identical or different and each is independently of the other an
integer from 2 to 5, preferably p29 and p30 are 3, and the dashed line indicates attachment to A2 if the backbone reagent has the structure of formula (aI), to A3 or A4 if the backbone reagent has the structure of formula (aII), to A5 if the backbone reagent has the structure of formula (aIII) and to A6 if the backbone reagent has the structure of formula (aIV); - a moiety of formula (e-vii)
Figure imgf000072_0001
wherein
p31 to p36 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 2 to 5, preferably p31 to p36 are 3, and
the dashed line indicates attachment to A2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A3 or A4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); - a moiety of formula (e-viii)
Figure imgf000073_0001
wherein
p37 to p50 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 2 to 5, preferably p37 to p50 are 3, and
the dashed line indicates attachment to A2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A3 or A4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); and - a moiety of formula (e-ix):
Figure imgf000074_0001
wherein p51 to p80 are identical or different and each is independently of the others an integer from 2 to 5, preferably p51 to p80 are 3, and
the dashed line indicates attachment to A2 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), to A3 or A4 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII), to A5 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII) and to A6 if the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIV); and wherein the moieties (e-i) to (e-v) may at each chiral center be in either R- or S- configuration, preferably, all chiral centers of a moiety (e-i) to (e-v) are in the same configuration. Preferably, Hypx is has a structure of formulas (e-i), (e-ii), (e-iii), (e-iv), (e-vi), (e-vii), (e-viii) or (e-ix). More preferably, Hypx has a structure of formulas (e-ii), (e-iii), (e-iv), (e-vii), (e- viii) or (e-ix), even more preferably Hypx has a structure of formulas (e-ii), (e-iii), (e-vii) or (e-viii) and most preferably Hypx has the structure of formula (e-iii). If the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI), a preferred moiety -A2 -Hyp1 is a moiety of the formula
Figure imgf000075_0001
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to P; and
E1 is selected from formulas (e-i) to (e-ix). If the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aII) a preferred moiety Hyp2-A3- is a moiety of the formula
Figure imgf000076_0001
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to P; and
E1 is selected from formulas (e-i) to (e-ix); and a preferred moiety -A4-Hyp3 is a moiety of the formula
Figure imgf000076_0002
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to P; and
E1 is selected from formulas (e-i) to (e-ix). If the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aIII), a preferred moiety -A5-Hyp4 is a moiety of the formula
Figure imgf000076_0003
,
wherein
the dashed line indicates attachment to P1; and
E1 is selected from formulas (e-i) to (e-ix). More preferably, the backbone reagent has a structure of formula (aI) and B has a structure of formula (a-xiv). Even more preferably, the backbone reagent has the structure of formula (aI), B has the structure of formula (a-xiv), x1 and x2 are 0, and A1 is -O-. Even more preferably, the backbone reagent has the structure of formula (aI), B has the structure of formula (a-xiv), A1 is -O-, and P has a structure of formula (c-i). Even more preferably, the backbone reagent is formula (aI), B is of formula (a-xiv), x1 and x2 are 0, A1 is -O-, P is of formula (c-i), A2 is–NH-(C=O)- and Hyp1 is of formula (e-iii). Most preferably, the backbone reagent has the following formula:
Figure imgf000077_0001
wherein
n ranges from 10 to 40, preferably from 10 to 30, more preferably from 20 to 30 and most preferably n is 28. SP is a spacer moiety selected from the group comprising C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl and C2-6 alkynyl, preferably SP is -CH2-, -CH2-CH2-, -CH(CH3)-, -CH2-CH2-CH2-,
-CH(C2H5)-, -C(CH3)2-, -CH=CH- and -CH=CH-, most preferably SP is -CH2-, -CH2-CH2- or -CH=CH-. The at least one crosslinker reagent of step (a-ii) comprises at least one carbonyloxy group (-(C=O)-O- or–O-(C=O)-), which is/are (a) biodegradable linkage(s). Such biodegradable linkage renders the hydrogel biodegradable. Additionally, the at least one crosslinker reagent comprises at least two activated functional end groups which during the polymerization of step (b) react with the functional groups Ax0 of the at least one backbone reagent. The crosslinker reagent has a molecular weight ranging from 0.5 to 40 kDa, more preferably ranging from 0.75 to 30 kDa, even more preferably ranging from 1 to 20 kDa, even more preferably ranging from 1 to 10 kDa, even more preferably ranging from 1 to 7.5 kDa and most preferably ranging from 2 kDa to 4 kDa. The crosslinker reagent comprises at least two activated functional end groups selected from the group comprising activated ester groups, activated carbamate groups, activated carbonate groups and activated thiocarbonate groups, which during polymerization react with the amine groups of the backbone reagents, forming amide linkages. In one preferred embodiment, the crosslinker reagent is a compound of formula (V-I):
Figure imgf000078_0001
(V-I),
wherein
each D1, D2, D3 and D4 are identical or different and each is independently of the others selected from the group comprising -O-, -NR5-, -S- and -CR6R6a-;
each R1, R1a, R2, R2a, R3, R3a, R4, R4a, R6 and R6a are identical or different and each is independently of the others selected from the group comprising -H, -OR7, - NR7R7a, -SR7 and C1-6 alkyl; optionally, each of the pair(s) R1/R2, R3/R4, R1a/R2a, and R3a/R4a may independently form a chemical bond and/or each of the pairs R1/R1a, R2/R2a, R3/R3a, R4/R4a, R6/R6a, R1/R2, R3/R4, R1a/R2a, and R3a/R4a are independently of each other joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a C3-8 cycloalkyl or to form a ring A or are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or 8- to 11-membered
heterobicyclyl or adamantyl; each R5 is independently selected from -H and C1-6 alkyl; optionally, each of the pair(s) R1/R5, R2/R5, R3/R5, R4/R5 and R5/R6 may independently form a chemical bond and/or are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl;
each R7, R7a is independently selected from H and C1-6 alkyl;
A is selected from the group consisting of indenyl, indanyl and tetralinyl;
P2 is
Figure imgf000079_0001
m ranges from 120 to 920, preferably from 120 to 460 and more preferably from 120 to 230;
r1, r2, r7, r8 are independently 0 or 1;
r3, r6 are independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
r4, r5 are independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10;
s1, s2 are independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;
Y1, Y2 are identical or different and each is independently of the other selected from formulas (f-i) to (f-vii):
(f-iii) ,
f-vi)
Figure imgf000079_0002
Figure imgf000080_0001
wherein
the dashed lines indicate attachment to the rest of the molecule,
b is 1, 2, 3 or 4
XH is Cl, Br, I, or F. Preferably, the crosslinker reagent is a compound of formula (V-II):
Figure imgf000080_0002
Figure imgf000080_0004
(V-II),
wherein
D1, D2, D3 and D4 are identical or different and each is independently of the others selected from the group comprising O, NR5, S and CR5R5a;
R1, R1a, R2, R2a, R3, R3a, R4, R4a, R5 and R5a are identical or different and each is independently of the others selected from the group comprising H and C1-6 alkyl; optionally, one or more of the pair(s) R1/R1a, R2/R2a, R3/R3a, R4/R4a, R1/R2, R3/R4, R1a/R2a, and R3a/R4a form a chemical bond or are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C3-8 cycloalkyl or to form a ring A or are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl or adamantyl;
A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl and tetralinyl;
P2 is
Figure imgf000080_0003
m ranges from 11 to 908, preferably from 17 to 680, even more preferably from 22 to 454, even more preferably from 22 to 227, even more preferably from 22 to 170 and more preferably from 45 to 90;
r1, r2, r7, r8 are independently 0 or 1;
r3, r6 are independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
r4, r5 are independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10;
s1, s2 are independently 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;
Y1, Y2 are identical or different and each is independently of the other selected from formulas (f-i) to (f-vii):
Figure imgf000081_0001
wherein
the dashed lines indicate attachment to the rest of the molecule,
b is 1, 2, 3 or 4
XH is Cl, Br, I, or F. It is understood that the moieties
Figure imgf000082_0001
represent the at least two activated functional end groups. Preferably, Y1 and Y2 of formula (V-I) or (V-II) have a structure of formula (f-i), (f-ii) or (f- v). More preferably, Y1 and Y2 of formula (V-I) or (V-II) have a structure of formula (f-i) or (f-ii) and most preferably, Y1 and Y2 have a structure of formula (f-i). Preferably, both moieties Y1 and Y2 of formula (V-I) or (V-II) have the same structure. More preferably, both moieties Y1 and Y2 have the structure of formula (f-i). Preferably, r1 of formula (V-I) or (V-II) is 0. Preferably, r1 and s1 of formula (V-I) or (V-II) are both 0. Preferably, one or more of the pair(s) R1/R1a, R2/R2a, R3/R3a, R4/R4a, R1/R2, R3/R4, R1a/R2a, and R3a/R4a of formula (V-I) or (V-II) form a chemical bond or are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C3-8 cycloalkyl or form a ring A. Preferably, one or more of the pair(s) R1/R2, R1a/R2a, R3/R4, R3a/R4a of formula (V-I) or (V-II) are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl.
Preferably, the crosslinker reagent of formula (V-I) and (V-II) is symmetric, i.e. the moiety
Figure imgf000082_0002
has the same structure as the moiety
Figure imgf000083_0001
In one preferred embodiment s1, s2, r1 and r8 of formula (V-I) and (V-II) are 0. In another preferred embodiment s1, s2, r1 and r8 of formula (V-I) and (V-II) are 0 and r4 of formula (V-I) and (V-II) and r5 are 1. Preferred crosslinker reagents are of formula (V-1) to (V-54):
Figure imgf000083_0002
Figure imgf000084_0001
Figure imgf000085_0001
Figure imgf000086_0001
Figure imgf000087_0001
Figure imgf000088_0002
Figure imgf000088_0003
Figure imgf000088_0004
Figure imgf000088_0001
cis cis
Figure imgf000089_0001
Figure imgf000090_0001
Figure imgf000091_0001
cis cis (V-54) wherein
each crosslinker reagent may be in the form of its racemic mixture, where applicable; and m, Y1 and Y2 are defined as above. Crosslinker reagents V-11 to V-54, V-1 and V-2 are preferred crosslinker reagents.
Crosslinker reagents Va-11 to Va-54, Va-1 and Va-2 are most preferred crosslinker reagents. Most preferred is crosslinker reagent Va-14. In another embodiment, crosslinker reagents V-1, V-2, V-5, V-6, V-7, V-8, V-9, V-10, V-11, V-12, V-13, V-14, V-15, V-16, V-17, V-18, V-19, V-20, V-21, V-22, V-23, V-24, V-25, V- 26, V-27, V-28, V-29, V-30, V-31, V-32, V-33, V-34, V-35, V-36, V-37, V-38, V-39, V-40, V-41, V-42, V-43, V-44, V-45, V-46, V-47, V-48, V-49, V-50, V-51, V-52, V-53 an V-54 are preferred crosslinker reagents. More preferably, the at least one crosslinker reagent is of formula V-5, V-6, V-7, V-8, V-9, V-10, V-14, V-22, V-23, V-43, V-44, V-45 or V-46, and most preferably, the at least one crosslinker reagent is of formula V-5, V-6, V-9 or V-14. The preferred embodiments of the compound of formula (V-I) and (V-II) as mentioned above apply accordingly to the preferred compounds of formulas (V-1) to (V-53). In a preferred embodiment, the hydrogel comprises Ax0 in the form of primary or secondary amine functional groups. Preferably, such hydrogel contains from 0.01 to 1 mmol/g primary amine groups (-NH2), more preferably, from 0.02 to 0.5 mmol/g primary amine groups and most preferably from 0.05 to 0.3 mmol/g primary amine groups. The term“X mmol/g primary amine groups” means that 1 g of dry hydrogel comprises X mmol primary amine groups. Measurement of the amine content of the hydrogel is carried out according to Gude et al. (Letters in Peptide Science, 2002, 9(4): 203-206, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety). Preferably, the term“dry” as used herein means having a residual water content of a maximum of 10%, preferably less than 5% and more preferably less than 2% (determined according to Karl Fischer). The preferred method of drying is lyophilization. It is understood that the hydrogel may be modified by conjugating certain moieties other than L1 to remaining functional groups Ax0, such as for example spacer moieties and/or polymers and that also such modified hydrogel may be one embodiment of Z. In a preferred embodiment -Z is a hydrogel obtainable from the process for the preparation of a hydrogel as detailed above which is optionally modified by conjugating a spacer moiety- fatty acid or polymer moiety conjugate -SP0-Z0 to remaining functional groups Ax0. Such spacer moiety -SP0- is preferably selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(Rz1)-, -S(O)2N(Rz1)-, -S(O)N(Rz1)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-,
-N(Rz1)S(O)2N(Rz1a)-, -S-, -N(Rz1)-, -OC(ORz1)(Rz1a)-, -N(Rz1)C(O)N(Rz1a)-, -OC(O)N(Rz1)-, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T-, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -Rz2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-,
-C(O)N(Rz3)-, -S(O)2N(Rz3)-, -S(O)N(Rz3)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(Rz3)S(O)2N(Rz3a)-,
-S-, -N(Rz3)-, -OC(ORz3)(Rz3a)-, -N(Rz3)C(O)N(Rz3a)-, and -OC(O)N(Rz3)-; -Rz1 and -Rz1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, -T, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -Rz2, which are the same or different, and wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-,
-C(O)N(Rz4)-, -S(O)2N(Rz4)-, -S(O)N(Rz4)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(Rz4)S(O)2N(Rz4a)-, -S-, -N(Rz4)-, -OC(ORz4)(Rz4a)-, -N(Rz4)C(O)N(Rz4a)-, and -OC(O)N(Rz4)-; each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl; wherein each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more -Rz2, which are the same or different; each -Rz2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, -CN, oxo
(=O), -COORz5, -ORz5, -C(O)Rz5, -C(O)N(Rz5Rz5a), -S(O)2N(Rz5Rz5a), -S(O)N(Rz5Rz5a), -S(O)2Rz5, -S(O)Rz5, -N(Rz5)S(O)2N(Rz5aRz5b), -SRz5, -N(Rz5Rz5a), -NO2, -OC(O)Rz5, -N(Rz5)C(O)Rz5a, -N(Rz5)S(O)2Rz5a, -N(Rz5)S(O)Rz5a, -N(Rz5)C(O)ORz5a,
-N(Rz5)C(O)N(Rz5aRz5b), -OC(O)N(Rz5Rz5a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; each -Rz3, -Rz3a, -Rz4, -Rz4a, -Rz5, -Rz5a and -Rz5b is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different. In one embodiment -Z0 comprises a C8-18 alkyl group. In another embodiment -Z0 comprises a water-soluble polymer with a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa. Preferably, -Z0 comprises at least one of the polymers selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones), poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl-oxazolines), poly(hydroxymethacrylates), poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamides), poly(hydroxypropyl methacrylates),
poly(hydroxypropyloxazolines), poly(iminocarbonates), poly(lactic acids), poly(lactic-co- glycolic acids), poly(methacrylamides), poly(methacrylates), poly(methyloxazolines), poly(organophosphazenes), poly(ortho esters), poly(oxazolines), poly(propylene glycols), poly(siloxanes), poly(urethanes), poly(vinyl alcohols), poly(vinyl amines),
poly(vinylmethylethers), poly(vinylpyrrolidones), silicones, celluloses, carbomethyl celluloses, hydroxypropyl methylcelluloses, chitins, chitosans, dextrans, dextrins, gelatins, hyaluronic acids and derivatives, functionalized hyaluronic acids, mannans, pectins, rhamnogalacturonans, starches, hydroxyalkyl starches, hydroxyethyl starches and other carbohydrate-based polymers, xylans, and copolymers thereof. In a preferred embodiment the poly(amide) is a peptide or protein. In another preferred embodiment -Z0 comprises a PEG-based polymer comprising at last 10% PEG, such as at least 20 % PEG, at least 30 % PEG, at least 40 % PEG or at least 50% PEG; or a hyaluronic acid-based polymer comprising at least 10 % hyaluronic acid, such as at least 20 % hyaluronic acid, at least 30% hyaluronic acid, at least 40 % hyaluronic acid or at least 50 % hyaluronic acid. In the prodrugs, their pharmaceutically acceptable salts and the prodrug reagents of the present invention -L2- and -L2’- of formula (I) and (I’) are independently of each other a chemical bond or a spacer moiety. When -L2- and -L2’- are other than a single chemical bond, -L2- and -L2’- are preferably independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(Ry1)-, -S(O)2N(Ry1)-, -S(O)N(Ry1)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(Ry1)S(O)2N(Ry1a)-, -S-, -N(Ry1)-, -OC(ORy1)(Ry1a)-, -N(Ry1)C(O)N(Ry1a)-, -OC(O)N(Ry1)-, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T-, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -Ry2, which are the same or different and wherein C1- 50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(Ry3)-,
-S(O)2N(Ry3)-, -S(O)N(Ry3)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(Ry3)S(O)2N(Ry3a)-, -S-,
-N(Ry3)-, -OC(ORy3)(Ry3a)-, -N(Ry3)C(O)N(Ry3a)-, and -OC(O)N(Ry3)-; -Ry1 and -Ry1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, -T, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -Ry2, which are the same or different, and wherein C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-,
-C(O)N(Ry4)-, -S(O)2N(Ry4)-, -S(O)N(Ry4)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(Ry4)S(O)2N(Ry4a)-, -S-, -N(Ry4)-, -OC(ORy4)(Ry4a)-, -N(Ry4)C(O)N(Ry4a)-, and -OC(O)N(Ry4)-; each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl; wherein each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more -Ry2, which are the same or different; each -Ry2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, -CN, oxo
(=O), -COORy5, -ORy5, -C(O)Ry5, -C(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), -S(O)2N(Ry5Ry5a), -S(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), -S(O)2Ry5, -S(O)Ry5, -N(Ry5)S(O)2N(Ry5aRy5b), -SRy5, -N(Ry5Ry5a), -NO2, -OC(O)Ry5, -N(Ry5) C(O)Ry5a, -N(Ry5)S(O)2Ry5a, -N(Ry5)S(O)Ry5a, -N(Ry5)C(O)ORy5a, -N(Ry5)C(O)N(Ry5aRy5b), -OC(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; and each -Ry3, -Ry3a, -Ry4, -Ry4a, -Ry5, -Ry5a and -Ry5b is independently selected from the group consisting of -H, and C1-6 alkyl, wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different. When -L2- and -L2’- are other than a single chemical bond, -L2- and -L2’- are even more preferably independently of each selected from -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-,
-C(O)N(Ry1)-, -S(O)2N(Ry1)-, -S(O)N(Ry1)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(Ry1)S(O)2N(Ry1a)-, -S-, -N(Ry1)-, -OC(ORy1)(Ry1a)-, -N(Ry1)C(O)N(Ry1a)-, -OC(O)N(Ry1)-, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl; wherein -T-, C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -Ry2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-20 alkyl, C2- 20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(Ry3)-, -S(O)2N(Ry3)-, - S(O)N(Ry3)-,
-S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(Ry3)S(O)2N(Ry3a)-, -S-, -N(Ry3)-, -OC(ORy3)(Ry3a)-, -N(Ry3)C(O)N(Ry3a)- , and -OC(O)N(Ry3)-; -Ry1 and -Ry1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, -T, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl; wherein -T, C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more-Ry2, which are the same or different, and wherein C1-10 alkyl, C2-10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-,
-C(O)N(Ry4)-, -S(O)2N(Ry4)-, -S(O)N(Ry4)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)-, -N(Ry4)S(O)2N(Ry4a)-, -S-, -N(Ry4)-, -OC(ORy4)(Ry4a)-, -N(Ry4)C(O)N(Ry4a)-, and -OC(O)N(Ry4)-; each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl; wherein each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more -Ry2, which are the same or different; -Ry2 is selected from the group consisting of halogen, -CN, oxo
(=O), -COORy5, -ORy5, -C(O)Ry5, -C(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), -S(O)2N(Ry5Ry5a), -S(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), -S(O)2Ry5, -S(O)Ry5, -N(Ry5)S(O)2N(Ry5aRy5b), -SRy5, -N(Ry5Ry5a), -NO2, -OC(O)Ry5, -N(Ry5)C(O)Ry5a, -N(Ry5)S(O)2Ry5a, -N(Ry5)S(O)Ry5a, -N(Ry5)C(O)ORy5a,
-N(Ry5)C(O)N(Ry5aRy5b), -OC(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; and each -Ry3, -Ry3a, -Ry4, -Ry4a, -Ry5, -Ry5a and -Ry5b is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different. When -L2- and -L2’- are other than a single chemical bond, -L2- and -L2’- are even more preferably independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -T-, -C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(Ry1)-, -S(O)2N(Ry1)-, -S(O)N(Ry1)-, -S(O)2-,
-S(O)-, -N(Ry1)S(O)2N(Ry1a)-, -S-, -N(Ry1)-, -OC(ORy1)(Ry1a)-,
-N(Ry1)C(O)N(Ry1a)-, -OC(O)N(Ry1)-, C1-50 alkyl, C2-50 alkenyl, and C2-50 alkynyl;
wherein -T-, C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more -Ry2, which are the same or different and wherein C1-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, and C2-20 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of -T-,
-C(O)O-, -O-, -C(O)-, -C(O)N(Ry3)-, -S(O)2N(Ry3)-, -S(O)N(Ry3)-, -S(O)2-,
-S(O)-, -N(Ry3)S(O)2N(Ry3a)-, -S-, -N(Ry3)-, -OC(ORy3)(Ry3a)-, -N(Ry3)C(O)N(Ry3a)-, and -OC(O)N(Ry3)-; -Ry1 and -Ry1a are independently selected from the group consisting of -H, -T, C1-10 alkyl, C2- 10 alkenyl, and C2-10 alkynyl; each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl; each -Ry2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, and C1-6 alkyl; and each -Ry3, -Ry3a, -Ry4, -Ry4a, -Ry5, -Ry5a and -Ry5b is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, and C1-6 alkyl; wherein C1-6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different. Even more preferably, -L2- and -L2’- are a C1-20 alkyl chain, which is optionally interrupted by one or more groups independently selected from -O-, -T- and -C(O)N(R1aa)-; and which C1-20 alkyl chain is optionally substituted with one or more groups independently selected from -OH, -T and -C(O)N(Ry6Ry6a); wherein -Ry6, -Ry6a are independently selected from the group consisting of H and C1-4 alkyl and wherein -T- is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and 8- to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl. Preferably, -L2- and -L2’- have a molecular weight in the range of from 14 g/mol to 750 g/mol. Preferably, -L2- comprises a moiety selected from
Figure imgf000098_0001
,
Figure imgf000099_0001
, , ; wherein
dashed lines indicate attachment to the rest of -L2-; and
-R and -Ra are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of -H, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl and hexyl. -L2-Z and -L2’-Y can be attached to -L1- of formula (I) or (I’) by replacing any -H present. Preferably, one to five of the hydrogen given
by -R1, -R1a, -R2, -R3, -R4, -R4a, -R5, -R5a, -R6, -R7 and -R7a are replaced by -L2-Z and/or -L2’- Y. More preferably, only one hydrogen of -L1- of formula (I) or (I’) is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. In other words, it is preferred that -L1- of formula (I) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z and that -L1- of formula (I’) is substituted with one moiety -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. In a preferred embodiment -R4a of formula (I) is substituted with -L2-Z, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R4a is replaced by -L2-Z. Preferably, -R4a is -H which is replaced by -L2-Z. In a preferred embodiment -R4a of formula (I’) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2’-Y, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R4a is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. Preferably, -R4a is -H which is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. In another embodiment -R4 of formula (I) is substituted with -L2-Z, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R4 is replaced by -L2-Z. Preferably, -R4 is -H which is replaced by -L2-Z. In another embodiment -R4 of formula (I’) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2’-Y, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R4 is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. Preferably, -R4 is -H which is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. In another embodiment -R1 of formula (I) is substituted with -L2-Z, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R1 is replaced by -L2-Z. Preferably, -R1 is -H which is replaced by -L2-Z. In another embodiment -R1 of formula (I’) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2’-Y, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R1 is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. Preferably, -R1 is -H which is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. In another embodiment -R1a of formula (I) is substituted with -L2-Z, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R1a is replaced by -L2-Z. Preferably, -R1a is -H which is replaced by -L2-Z. In another embodiment -R1a of formula (I’) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2’-Y, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R1a is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. Preferably, -R1a is -H which is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. In another embodiment -R3 of formula (I) is substituted with -L2-Z, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R3 is replaced by -L2-Z. Preferably, -R3 is -H which is replaced by -L2-Z. In another embodiment -R3 of formula (I’) is substituted with -L2-Z or -L2’-Y, i.e. any one of the -H present in -R3 is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. Preferably, -R3 is -H which is replaced by -L2-Z or -L2’-Y. Another aspect of the present invention is a method of synthesis of a prodrug or
pharmaceutical salt thereof of the present invention. Preferably, the method of synthesis of a prodrug of the present invention comprises the steps of (a) Providing a reagent comprising a moiety Y-L2’-L1-Q,
wherein
-Y is a functional group,
-L2’- is a chemical bond or a spacer,
-L1- is of formula (I’) which optionally comprises functional groups protected with protecting groups,
-Q is -OH or a leaving group;
(b) Reacting -Q of the reagent of step (a) with a primary or secondary amine or hydroxyl functional group of a drug D-H by forming an amide or ester linkage
between -L1- and -D, respectively; wherein the drug optionally comprises further functional groups which may optionally be protected with protecting groups;
(c) Reacting a reagent comprising Z having at least one functional group -Y’ with -Y of the intermediate of step (b) by forming a linkage between Z and -L2’-, resulting in Z being conjugated to at least one moiety -L2-L1-D;
(d) Optionally removing the protecting groups present. It is understood that one or more functional groups -Y’ of Z react with a functional group -Y, i.e. that one or more reagents of step (a) are conjugated to Z. Preferred embodiments for -Y, -L1-, -L2’-, -L2-, -D and -Q are as described above. In an equally preferred embodiment the method of synthesis of a prodrug of the present invention comprises the steps of
(a) Providing a reagent comprising a moiety Y-L2’-L1-Q,
wherein
-Y is a functional group,
-L2’- is a chemical bond or a spacer,
-L1- is of formula (I’) which optionally comprises functional groups protected with protecting groups,
-Q is -OH or a leaving group;
(b) Reacting a reagent comprising Z having at least one functional group -Y’ with -Y of the reagent of step (a) by forming a linkage between Z and -L2’-, resulting in Z being conjugated to at least one moiety -L2-L1-Q ; (c) Reacting -Q of the intermediate of step (b) with a primary or secondary amine or hydroxyl functional group of a drug D-H by forming an amide or ester linkage between L1 and D, respectively; wherein the drug optionally comprises further functional groups which may optionally be protected with protecting groups;
(d) Optionally removing the protecting groups present. It is understood that one or more functional groups -Y’ of Z react with a functional group -Y, i.e. that one or more reagents of step (a) are conjugated to Z. Preferred embodiments for -Y, -L1-, -L2’-, -L2-, -D and -Q are as described above. Preferred embodiments of -Y’ correspond to the preferred embodiments of -Y as described above. The person skilled in the art is aware that not every Y can be used in combination with any Y’ and will have no problem identifying suitable pairs. Preferred pairs Y/Y’ are the following:
^ Y is maleimide, Y’ is selected from thiol, amine and selenide;
^ Y’ is maleimide, Y is selected from thiol, amine and selenide;
^ Y is selected from formulas (z’vi), (z’iii) and (z’iv), Y’ is of formula (z’x);
^ Y’ is selected from formulas (z’vi), (z’iii) and (z’iv), Y is of formula (z’x);
^ Y is selected from formulas (z’ii), (z’v), (z’vii) and a terminal alkynyl, Y’ is azide; ^ Y’ is selected from formulas (z’ii), (z’v), (z’vii) and a terminal alkynyl, Y is azide; ^ Y is of formula (z’xx), Y’ is azide;
^ Y’ is of formula (z’xx), Y is azide;
^ Y is of formula (z’viii), Y’ is of formula (z’i);
^ Y’ is of formula (z’viii), Y is of formula (z’i);
^ Y is of formula (z’ix), Y’ is of formula (z’iv); It is understood that the above listed pairs Y/Y’ are preferred examples and do not represent a comprehensive list of all possible pairs. Another aspect of the present invention is a pharmaceutical composition comprising the prodrug of the present invention and one or more excipients. A further aspect of the present invention is the prodrug of the present invention or the pharmaceutical composition comprising the prodrug of the present invention for use as a medicament. Another aspect of the present invention is the prodrug or the pharmaceutical composition comprising the prodrug of the present invention for use in a method of treatment of a disease which can be treated with the corresponding drug released from the prodrug. Another aspect of the present invention is the use of the prodrug or the pharmaceutical composition comprising the prodrug of the present invention for the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disease which can be treated with the corresponding drug released from the prodrug. A further aspect of the present invention is a method of treating, controlling, delaying or preventing in a mammalian patient, preferably a human patient, in need of the treatment, control, delay or prevention of one or more diseases which can be treated with the corresponding drug released from the prodrug, comprising the step of administering to said patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of the prodrug or the
pharmaceutical composition the prodrug of the present invention. An additional aspect of the present invention is a method of administering the prodrug or the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention, wherein the method comprises the step of administering the prodrug or the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention via topical, enteral or parenteral administration and by methods of external application, injection or infusion, including intraarticular, periarticular, intradermal, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous, intraosseous, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intravitreal, intratympanic, intravesical, intracardiac, transtracheal, subcuticular, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal, intraventricular, intrasternal injection and infusion, direct delivery to the brain via implanted device allowing delivery of the invention or the like to brain tissue or brain fluids (e.g., Ommaya Reservoir), direct intracerebroventricular injection or infusion, injection or infusion into brain or brain associated regions, injection into the subchoroidal space, retro-orbital injection and ocular instillation, preferably via subcutaneous injection.
Examples Materials and Methods Materials:
PEG 2 (example 1) was obtained from Biomatrik Inc., Jiaxing, China.
2-chlorotrityl resin, PyBOP, HATU and amino acids were purchased from Novabiochem, Merck Chemicals GmbH, Schwalbach, Germany.
TFA was purchased from Carl Roth GmbH & Co. KG, Karlsruhe, Germany.
All other chemicals were obtained from Sigma-Aldrich Chemie Gmbh, Munich, Germany. Methods:
Reactions were performed with dry solvents (CH2Cl2, DMF, THF) purchased from Sigma- Aldrich Chemie GmbH, Munich, Germany. Generally, reactions were stirred at room temperature and monitored by LCMS. Preparative HPLC was done on a reverse phase column (XBridge BEH300 C18 OBD Prep 10 µm 30x150 mm) connected to a Waters 600 or 2535 HPLC system and Waters 2489 absorbance detector. Gradients of solution A (0.1% TFA in H2O) and solution B (0.1% TFA in acetonitrile) were used. HPLC fractions containing product were combined and lyophilized. Preparative LPLC was done on a reverse phase column (Biotage SNAP KP-C18-HS) connected to an Isolera One system from Biotage AB, Sweden. Products were detected at 215 nm. Gradients of solution A (0.1% TFA in H2O) and solution B (0.1% TFA in acetonitrile) were used. Fractions containing product were combined and lyophilized. Flash chromatography purifications were performed on an Isolera One system from Biotage AB, Sweden, using Biotage KP-Sil silica cartridges and n-heptane, and ethyl acetate as eluents. Products were detected at 254 nm. Analytical LCMS was performed on a Waters Acquity UPLC with an Acquity PDA detector coupled to a Waters Micromass ZQ or an Agilent technologies 1290 system with a G4212A diode array and a G6120B single quad MS system equipped with a Waters ACQUITY UPLC BEH300 C18 reverse phase column (2.1 x 50 mm, 300 Å, 1.7 μm, flow: 0.25 ml/min; solvent A: H20 + 0.04% TFA, solvent B: acetonitrile + 0.05% TFA). Analytical UPLC-MS for protein conjugation reaction was performed on an Agilent 1290 Infinity system with an Acquity PDA detector coupled to an iFunnel QTOF equipped with a Waters ACQUITY UPLC BEH300 C4 reverse phase column (2.1 x 50 mm, 300 Å, 1.7 μm, flow: 0.25 ml/min; solvent A: H20 + 0.05% TFA, solvent B: acetonitrile + 0.04% TFA). Example 1:
2
3
Figure imgf000105_0001
Fmoc-Glu(OtBu)-OH (1) (277.38 mg; 0.65 mmol; 1.00 eq.), m-dPEG8-amine (2) (250.00 mg; 0.65 mmol; 1.00 eq.) and PyBOP (508.89 mg; 0.98 mmol; 1.50 eq.) were dissolved in anhydrous DMF, (5.00 ml). Then DIPEA (340.66 µl; 1.96 mmol; 3.00 eq.) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate (15 ml) and the organic solution was washed with 1 M HCl (3x 15 ml) and brine (15 ml). The organic phase was dried over MgSO4, filtered and
concentrated. The residue was dried at HV overnight. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography to yield the PEGylated glutamate 3 as colorless oil. Yield: 517.00 mg, 100% Exam le 2:
Figure imgf000106_0001
Glutamate ester 3 (258.50 mg; 325.98 µmol; 1.00 eq.) was dissolved in trifluoroacetic acid (2.00 ml; 25.96 mmol; 79.64 eq.) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. An LCMS chromatogram showed complete conversion to the product. The solvent was evaporated in a stream of argon and the product was dried in vacuo. Yield: 268.00 mg, 100% Example 3:
 
Figure imgf000106_0002
Step 1:
2-chlorotrityl chloride resin (1.33 mmol/g; 173 mg; 230 µmol, 1 eq.) was placed in a 5 ml syringe reactor and swollen in 1 ml DCM, and then the solvent was drained.
Fmoc-Tyr(OtBu)-OH (317.20 mg; 0.69 mmol; 3.00 eq.) was suspended in DCM (1.00 ml), then DIPEA (0.16 ml; 0.92 mmol; 4.00 eq.) was added. The suspension turned into a clear solution. The solution was added to the pre-swollen resin and the mixture was shaken at room temperature for 1 h. The resin was washed with DCM (5x 1 ml) and DMF (5x 1 ml). Step 2:
A solution of 96:2:2 DMF/piperidine/DBU (1 ml) was shaken with the resin for 5 min. The procedure was repeated twice. The resin was washed with DMF (7x 1 ml). Step 3:
A yellow solution of Fmoc-Lys(ivDde)-OH (396.70 mg; 0.69 mmol; 3.00 eq.), HATU (262.46 mg; 0.69 mmol; 3.00 eq.) and DIPEA (0.24 ml; 1.38 mmol; 6.00 eq.) in DMF (1.00 ml) was added to the resin. The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 2 h. The resin was washed with DMF (7x 1 ml). Step 4:
A solution of 96:2:2 DMF/piperidine/DBU (1 ml) was shaken with the resin for 5 min. The procedure was repeated twice. The resin was washed with DMF (7x 1 ml). Step 5:
A yellow, clear solution of Fmoc-Ser(tBu)-OH (194.86 mg; 0.51 mmol; 3.00 eq.), HATU (193.23 mg; 0.51 mmol; 3.00 eq.) and DIPEA (131.36 mg; 1.02 mmol; 6.00 eq.) in DMF (2.00 ml) was added to H-Lys(ivDde)-Tyr(tBu)-O-resin (137.00 mg; 0.17 mmol; 1.00 eq.). The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 3 h. The resin was washed with dimethylformamide (6x 2 ml) and dichloromethane (6x 2 ml). The resin was dried under high vacuum for 1 hour. Step 6:
A solution of 96:2:2 DMF/piperidine/DBU (2 ml) was shaken with the resin for 5 min. The procedure was repeated twice. The resin was washed with DMF (7x 1 ml). Step 7:
Acetic anhydride (240.18 µl; 2.54 mmol; 15.00 eq.) and DIPEA (442.58 µl; 2.54 mmol; 15.00 eq.) in DMF (2.00 ml) were added to the resin. The suspension was shaken for 1.5 h at room temperature. The resin was washed with DMF (6x 2 ml) and dichloromethane (6x 2 ml). The resin was dried under high vacuum for 1 hour. Step 8:
A solution of 4% hydrazine hydrate (80.00 µl; 1.64 mmol; 9.71 eq.) in DMF (1.92 ml) (v/v) was shaken with the resin for 15 min. The resin was washed with DMF (7x 1 ml) and DCM (6x 1 ml). The resin was dried under high vacuum for 1 hour. Example 4:
Ac
Figure imgf000108_0001
Step 1:
Carboxylic acid 4 (151.00 mg; 183.67 µmol; 3.99 eq.) and PyBOP (83.90 mg; 161.22 µmol; 3.50 eq.) were dissolved in DMF (1.00 ml). DIPEA (56.16 µl; 322.44 µmol; 7.00 eq.) was added and the solution was drawn into a 2 ml syringe reactor, containing resin 5 (60.00 mg; 46.06 µmol; 1.00 eq.). The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 3 h. The resin was washed 5 times with 1 ml of DMF and 5 times with 5 ml of DCM. The resin was dried under high vacuum for 10 minutes. Step 2: A solution of 20% piperidine in DMF (1 ml) was drawn into the syringe reactor, containing Fmoc protected amine 6. The reaction mixture was shaken for 15 minutes. The procedure was repeated once. The resin was washed 5 times with 1 ml of DMF and 5 times with 5 ml of DCM. Step 3:
A solution of 95:2.5:2.5 TFA/TES/H2O (1 ml) was added to resin 7 and the mixture was shaken in the syringe reactor for 1 h. The resin was filtered off and washed with DCM (6x 1 ml). The filtrate was concentrated and the crude product was purified by preparative HPLC to yield 8.
Yield: 8.5 mg, 18% over 11 steps
Figure imgf000109_0001
10 The hydrolysis kinetics of PEGylated linker-peptide conjugate 8 were studied at pH 7.4, 37°C and pH 8.9, 37°C. Therefore, the starting material 8 was dissolved in two different buffers (60 mM phosphate, pH 7.4 and 100 mM borate pH 8.9, respectively). The resulting solutions were incubated in a water bath at 37°C. At given points in time samples were withdrawn, quenched and analyzed by LCMS. Curve fitting software was applied to determine the corresponding half-life of the release.
Ac-Ser-Lys-Tyr-OH (9) was released with a half-life of 56 d at pH 7.4 and 220 d at pH 8.9. Example 6:
Figure imgf000110_0001
Boc-Glu(Bn)-OH (11) (1 eq), PEG amine 12 (1 eq, n = 14), PyBOP (1.5 eq) and DIPEA (3 eq) are stirred in DMF until full conversion is obtained. The reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and the organic solution is washed with 1 M HCl and brine. The organic phase is dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash
chromatography to yield the PEGylated glutamate 13. Benzyl ester 13 (1 eq) is stirred with Pd/C (10%) in THF under an atmosphere of hydrogen until full conversion of the starting material. The mixture is filtered through Celite and concentrated to yield carboxylic acid 14. Carboxylic acid 14 (1 eq) is stirred with DCC (1.3 eq), HOSu (1.3 eq) and DIPEA (2.6 eq) in DCM to yield active ester 15. The crude compound is purified by preparative HPLC. Active ester 15 is conjugated to insulin in a mixture of DMF and buffer (pH 8). Protected insulin-linker conjugate 16 is purified by preparative HPLC. The protected insulin-linker conjugate 16 is stirred in a mixture of 9:1:0.25 HFIP/TFA/TES until the Boc group is removed completely. The solution is concentrated and the crude product is purified by preparative HPLC to yield final conjugate 17. Example 7:
Figure imgf000111_0001
m-PEG8-NH2 (2) (400.00 mg; 1.04 mmol; 1.00 eq.) was dissolved in THF (4 ml) and cooled to 0°C. A solution of di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (295.95 mg; 1.36 mmol; 1.30 eq.) in 4 ml of THF was added dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (50 ml) and extracted two times with saturated NaHCO3 (50 ml) and once with brine (50 ml). The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dried under high vacuum overnight yielding a colorless oil (18) (499 mg, 99%). The residue (18) (499 mg; 1.03 mmol; 1.00 eq.) was dissolved in THF (4.99 ml) and the solution was added dropwise to a cold (0 °C) solution of lithium aluminum hydride (1 M in THF) (1.03 ml; 1.00 mol/l; 1.03 mmol; 1.00 eq.). The reaction mixture was stirred for 10 min at room temperature and was then heated to 60 °C and stirred for 5 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0 °C, 43 µl of water were added, and the mixture was stirred for 4 min.42 µl of 3N NaOH and 43 µl of water were added, and the mixture was stirred for 30 min at room temperature. MgSO4 was added, the suspension was filtered through a small bed of celite and the filter cake was washed with THF. The resulting solution was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was dried under high vacuum overnight. Yield: 378 mg, 92%, colorless oil
Figure imgf000112_0001
Preparation of 21a: According to example 1 using 19 (378.00 mg; 0.95 mmol; 1.00 eq.) instead of 2. All other reagents were adjusted to scale. Purification by preparative HPLC. Yield: 427 mg, 56%, colorless oil Preparation of 21b: According to example 1 using 20 (143.26 mg; 0.33 mmol; 1.00 eq.) instead of 1. All other reagents were adjusted to scale.
Yield: 233 mg, 89%, colorless oil Preparation of 21c: According to example 1 using 20 (221.13 mg; 0.50 mmol; 1.00 eq.) instead of 1 and 19 (200.00 mg; 0.50 mmol; 1.00 eq.) instead of 2. All other reagents were adjusted to scale. Purification by preparative HPLC.
Yield: 299 mg, 73%, colorless oil
Figure imgf000112_0002
Preparation of 22a: According to example 2 using 21a (426.70 mg; 0.53 mmol; 1.00 eq.). All other reagents were adjusted to scale.
Yield: 397 mg, 100%, colorless oil Preparation of 22b: According to example 2 using 21b (233.00 mg; 0.29 mmol; 1.00 eq.). All other reagents were adjusted to scale.
Yield: 236 mg, 100%, colorless oil Preparation of 22c: According to example 2 using 21c (299.00 mg; 0.37 mmol; 1.00 eq.). All other reagents were adjusted to scale.
Yield: 348 mg, 100%, colorless oil
Figure imgf000113_0001
Preparation of 25a: According to example 4 using 22a (79.6 mg; 106 µmol; 2.50 eq.). All other reagents were adjusted to scale.
Yield: 31 mg, 77% Preparation of 25b: According to example 4 using 22b (35.7 mg; 43 µmol; 2.50 eq.). All other reagents were adjusted to scale.
Yield: 10.4 mg, 65% Preparation of 25c: According to example 4 using 22c (81 mg; 106 µmol; 2.50 eq.). All other reagents were adjusted to scale.
Yield: 31 mg, 76% Example 11:
9
Figure imgf000114_0001
Release kinetics were setup and analyzed according to example 5 with additional buffers at 37oC. Results are depicted in the table below.
Figure imgf000114_0002
Figure imgf000115_0002
The release is accelerated by phosphate in a concentration dependent matter. Citrate buffer shows good storage stability. Example 12:
Figure imgf000115_0001
General procedure for the synthesis of 28a-b: The amine (9.09 mmol, 10.00 eq.) was dissolved in acetonitrile (1.50 ml). n-hexyl bromide (127.55 µL; 0.91 mmol; 1.00 eq.) was added and the reaction was stirred for 16 h. The volatiles were removed in a stream of nitrogen and the residue was purified by preparative HPLC. Synthesis of 28a: Use of 27a (ethylamine, 2 M solution in THF (4.54 mL; 2.00 mol/l; 9.09 mmol; 10.00 eq.)) yielded 28a as colorless oil (171 mg, TFA salt, 77%) Synthesis of 28b: Use of 27b (isopropylamine (781 µL; 9.09 mmol; 10.00 eq.)) yielded 28b as colorless oil (207 mg, TFA salt, 89%) Example 13:
Figure imgf000116_0001
General procedure for the synthesis of 32a-d: Step 1:
Boc-Glu-OFm (72 mg; 170 µmol; 2.00 eq.) and PyBOP (88.5 mg; 170 µmol; 2.00 eq.) were dissolved in DMF (1.00 ml). DIPEA (0.06 mL; 340 µmol; 4.00 eq.) was added and the solution was drawn into a 2 ml syringe reactor, containing resin 5 (100.00 mg; 85.00 µmol; 1.00 eq.). The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 2 h. The resin was washed 5 times with 1 ml of DMF. Step 2:
A solution of DMF/piperidine/DBU 96:2:2 (2 ml) was drawn into the syringe reactor, containing Fm protected acid 29. The reaction mixture was shaken for 30 minutes. The procedure was repeated 2x for 15 min. The resin was washed 5 times with 1 ml of DMF and 5 times with 5 ml of DCM and was dried under high vacuum for 10 minutes. Step 3:
PyBOP (27.32 mg; 52.50 µmol; 2.50 eq.) and DIPEA (0.02 mL; 105.00 µmol; 5.00 eq.) were dissolved in DMF (0.50 ml) and the solution was drawn into a 2 ml syringe reactor, containing 30 (30 mg; 21.00 µmol; 1.00 eq.). The syringe was shaken and a solution of the amine (52.50 µmol; 2.50 eq.) in 0.1 ml DMF was drawn into the syringe. The reaction mixture was shaken at room temperature for 1.5 h. The resin was washed 5 times with 1 ml DMF and 5 times with 1 ml of DCM. Step 4:
A solution of 95:2.5:2.5 TFA/TES/H2O (1 ml) was added to the resin and the mixture was shaken in the syringe reactor for 30 min. The solution was collected and again a solution of 95:2.5:2.5 TFA/TES/H2O (1 ml) was added to the resin and the mixture was shaken in the syringe reactor for 15 minutes. The resin was filtered off and washed with DCM (3x 1 ml). All solutions were combined. The filtrate was concentrated and the crude product was purified by preparative HPLC. Preparation of 32a: According to general procedure above using 1-hexylamine (5.3 mg; 52.50 µmol; 2.50 eq.) in step 3.
Yield: 6.2 mg, 39% Preparation of 32b: According to general procedure above using n-hexylmethylamine (6 mg; 52.50 µmol; 2.50 eq.) in step 3.
Yield: 7.8 mg, 48% Preparation of 32c: According to general procedure above using n-hexylethylamine 28a (12.8 mg; 52.50 µmol; 2.50 eq.) and increasing the DIPEA equivalents to 7.5 eq. in step 3.
Yield: 9.3 mg, 56% Preparation of 32d: According to general procedure above using n-hexylisopropylamine 28b (12.8 mg; 52.50 µmol; 2.50 eq.) and increasing the DIPEA equivalents to 7.5 eq. in step 3. Yield: 4.3 mg, 25% Example 14:
Figure imgf000118_0001
Release kinetics were setup and analyzed according to example 5 with changed buffers. Results are depicted in the table below.
Figure imgf000118_0002
Figure imgf000119_0001
6-bromohexanoic acid (5.89 g; 30.19 mmol; 1.00 eq.) and sodium methanethiosulfonate (4.05 g; 30.19 mmol; 1.00 eq.) were dissolved in DMF (47.10 ml) under argon-atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80 °C for 3 hours and then brought to room temperature. The reaction mixture was diluted with 116 ml water and was washed three times with 233 ml of diethyl ether. The organic phase was washed with brine (350 ml), dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of 40 ml. The product was precipitated from the resulting solution in 2x 1150 ml of cold n-heptane. Precipitation was completed overnight at -18 °C. The supernatant was decanted and the precipitate was dissolved in 80 ml diethylether. The product was precipitated from the resulting solution in 2x 1000 ml of cold n-heptane. The suspension was stored at -18 °C for 2 hours. The precipitate was filtered and the solid was dried under high vacuum over night to give 34 as white solid.
Yield: 5.62 g, 82% Example 16:
Figure imgf000119_0002
4-Hydroxybenzyl alcohol (1.70 g; 13.69 mmol; 1.00 eq.) was dissolved in THF (20.5 ml) and DIPEA (4.77 mL; 27.39 mmol; 2.00 eq.) was added.4-nitrophenyl chloroformate (2.90 g; 14.38 mmol; 1.05 eq.) was dissolved in THF (5 ml) and was slowly dosed (via syringe pump within 30 min to the reaction mixture. The reaction was stirred for 30 additional minutes. N,N,N'-trimethylethylenediamine (2.21 mL; 17.12 mmol; 1.25 eq.) was slowly added to the reaction mixture and stirring was continued for 30 minutes. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0°C with an ice bath and was quenched with TFA (3.17 mL; 41.08 mmol; 3.00 eq.). The solution was diluted with 100 ml of water (pH <2) and was washed three times with 100 ml of ethyl acetate. The aqueous phase was frozen and lyophilized. The residue was co- evaporated with ethyl acetate. The residue was dissolved in 60 ml of dichloromethane and the solution was dried with Na2SO4, filtered and evaporated. The residue was dried under HV for 2 hours. The residue was dissolved in anhydrous acetonitrile (25 mL) and the solution was cooled with an ice-bath. Bis(pentafluorophenyl) carbonate (10.79 g; 27.38 mmol; 2.00 eq.), 4- (dimethylamino)pyridine (0.33 g; 2.74 mmol; 0.20 eq.) and DIPEA (9.54 mL; 54.76 mmol; 4.00 eq.) were added with stirring. The solution turned blue and a precipitate was visible. The reaction was stirred for 10 min. The reaction was cooled with an ice / NaCl bath to -15 °C and was quenched with a mixture of TFA (4.22 mL; 54.76 mmol; 4.00 eq.) and water/TFA 1:0.001 (13.54 mL). The solution was kept on ice and the product was purified by preparative LPLC.
Yield: 4.87 g (TFA salt), 62% Example 17:
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000121_0001
Boc-Glu(OtBu)-OH (380.01 mg; 1.25 mmol; 1.00 eq.) was dissolved in DMF (9.09 mL). PyBOP (977.85 mg; 1.88 mmol; 1.50 eq.), DIPEA (1.09 mL; 6.26 mmol; 5.00 eq.) and Fmoc-2-(2-aminoethoxy)-ethylamine hydrochloride (500.00 mg; 1.38 mmol; 1.10 eq.) were added. The mixture was stirred for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was diluted with 50 ml dichloromethane and was washed three times with 50 ml of 0.1 N HCl. The organic layer was washed two times with 50 ml saturated NaHCO3 and once with 50 ml of brine. The organic layer was dried with MgSO4, filtered and evaporated. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography to yield 37 as white foam.
Yield: 688 mg, 90% This compound (37, 688.00 mg; 1.12 mmol; 1.00 eq.) was dissolved in THF (9.98 mL). DBU (194.72 µL; 1.30 mmol; 1.16 eq.) was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 min. The solution was concentrated in a stream of argon and purified by flash chromatography to yield 38 as colorless oil.
Yield: 342 mg, 78% Compound 38 (342.00 mg; 0.88 mmol; 1.00 eq.) was dissolved in DCM (6.00 mL) and PyBOP (548.33 mg; 1.05 mmol; 1.20 eq.), 34 (238.47 mg; 1.05 mmol; 1.20 eq.) and DIPEA (0.46 mL; 2.63 mmol; 3.00 eq.) were added. The reaction was stirred for 30 min. The reaction was quenched with AcOH (0.46 ml) and diluted with 20 ml DCM, and 20 ml 0.1 M HCl was added. The organic phase was separated and the aqueous phase extracted 2x with 20 mL DCM. The aqueous phase was saturated with NaCl and extracted 3x with DCM. The organic phases were combined and the resulting solution concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give 39.
Yield: 421 mg, 80% This compound (39, 421.00 mg; 0.70 mmol; 1.00 eq.) was dissolved in DCM (4.21 mL) and TFA (4.21 mL) was added with vigorous stirring in an open flask. After 1 h the volatiles were removed in a stream of nitrogen. The residue was further dried in vacuo for 15 min.
Compound 39 (527.71 mg; 0.92 mmol; 1.30 eq.) was dissolved in anhydrous acetonitrile (4.21 mL) and DIPEA (1.23 mL; 7.04 mmol; 10.00 eq.) was added while cooling (ice-bath). The residue from above was dissolved in anhydrous acetonitrile (4.21 mL) and dropwise added over 5 minutes to the solution of 36. The reaction was further stirred for 5 min in the ice bath. TFA (0.4 mL; 5.28 mmol; 7.5 eq.) was added to the reaction. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue purified by preparative HPLC to give 40.
Yield: 447 mg (TFA salt), 76% Compound 40 (63.00 mg; 75.55 µmol; 1.00 eq.) was dissolved in DCM (2.00 mL) and HOSu (26.08 mg; 226.65 µmol; 3.00 eq.) and DCC (46.76 mg; 226.65 µmol; 3.00 eq.) weres added with stirring. A precipitate formed. After 30 min of stirring the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was suspended in MeCN/H2O/TFA 1:1:0.002 and filtered. The filtrate was purified by preparative HPLC to give 41.
Yield: 58.5 mg, 83% Abbreviations:
Boc tert-butyloxycarbonyl
DIPEA diisopropylethylamine
DCC dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
DBU 1,3-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undecene
DCM dichloromethane
DMF dimethylformamide
DTT dihiothreitol
Fab fragment antigen-binding
Fm 9-fluorenylmethl
Fmoc 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl
HATU 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium
3-oxid hexafluorophosphate
HFIP hexafluoroisopropanol
HOSu hydroxysuccinimide
HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
HV high vacuum
iPr isopropyl
ivDde 1-(4,4-dimethyl-2,6-dioxocyclohex-1-ylidene)-3-methylbutyl LCMS mass spectrometry-coupled liquid chromatography
MS mass spectrum / mass spectrometry
MTS methanethiosulfonate
PEG poly(ethylene glycol)
PyBOP (benzotriazole-1-yl-oxy)-tris-pyrrolidino-phosphonium
hexafluorophosphate
tBu tertiary butyl
TES triethylsilane
THF tetrahydrofurane
TFA trifluoroacetic acid
UPLC ultra performance liquid chromatography

Claims

Claims 1. A prodrug or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof comprising:
a conjugate D−L;
wherein:
−D is a primary or secondary amine-comprising biologically active moiety; and −L comprises a linker moiety -L1 represented by formula (I):
Figure imgf000124_0001
wherein:
the dashed line indicates attachment to the primary or secondary amine of the biologically active moiety;
−X1 is selected from the group consisting of−CR5R5a−,−O−,−NR5−, and−S−;
−R1,−R1a,−R2,−R3,−R4,−R4a,−R5, and−R5a are independently of other selected from−H, C1–6 alkyl, C1–6 alkenyl, and C1–6 alkynyl, wherein:
C1 ^6 alkyl, C1–6 alkenyl, and C1–6 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more R6, which are the same or different; and
C1–6 alkyl, C1–6 alkenyl, and C1–6 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of−T−,−C(O)O−,−O−,−C(O)−, −C(O)N(R7)−,−S(O)2N(R7)−,−S(O)N(R7)−, −S(O) 7 2−,−S(O)−,−N(R7)S(O)2N(R7a)−,−S−,−N(R )−, −OC(OR7)(R7a)−,−N(R7)C(O)N(R7a)−, and
−OC(O)N(R7)—; provided that the nitrogen marked with the asterisk is connected to−R2 through an SP3-hybridized carbon atom;
each T is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3–10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10- membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, wherein:
each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more R6, which are the same or different;
each−R6,−R7, and−R7a is independently selected from the group
consisting of–H and C1–6 alkyl, wherein:
C1–6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
halogen, which are the same or different;
=Y1 is selected from =O and =NR5;
optionally, one or more of the pairs−R1/−R1a,−R2/−R3,−R5/−R5a, and −R4/−R4a are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C3–10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or a 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl;
optionally, one or more of the pairs−R1/−R2,−R1/−R3,−R1/−R5,−R1/−R5a, −R1a/−R2,−R1a/−R3,−R1a/−R5,−R1a/−R5a,−R2/−R5,−R2/−R5a, −R3/−R5,−R3/−R5a are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring−A−, where:
−A− is selected from the group consisting of phenyl,
naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3–10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to
11-membered heterobicyclyl;
wherein−L1 is substituted with one to five moieties−L2−Z, preferably−L1 is substituted with one moiety−L2−Z, and is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (I) is not replaced by a substituent, wherein:
−L2− is a single chemical bond or a spacer moiety; and −Z is a carrier moiety.
2. The prodrug of claim 1;
wherein D is a small molecule biologically active moiety, oligonucleotide moiety, peptide nucleic acid moiety, peptide moiety, or protein moiety. 3. A prodrug reagent comprising:
a conjugate L'−Q;
wherein:
−Q is−OH or a leaving group; and
−L' comprises, preferably consists of, a linker moiety−L1 represented by formula (I'):
Figure imgf000126_0001
wherein:
the dashed line indicates attachment to−Q;
−X1 is selected from the group consisting of−CR5R5a−,−O−,−NR5−, and−S−;
−R1,−R1a,−R2,−R3,−R4,−R4a,−R5 and−R5a are independently of other selected from−H, C1–6 alkyl, C1–6 alkenyl, and C1–6 alkynyl, wherein:
C1–6 alkyl, C1–6 alkenyl, and C1–6 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more−R6, which are the same or different; and C1–6 alkyl, C1–6 alkenyl, and C1–6 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of−T−,−C(O)O−,−O−,−C(O)−, −C(O)N(R7)−,−S(O)2N(R7)−,−S(O)N(R7)−, −S(O)2−,−S(O)−,−N(R7)S(O)2N(R7a)−,−S−, −N(R7)−,−OC(OR7)(R7a)−,−N(R7)C(O)N(R7a)−, and −OC(O)N(R7)−;
provided that the nitrogen marked with the asterisk is
connected to−R2 through an SP3-hybridized carbon atom;
each T is independently of each other selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3–10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10- membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, wherein:
each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more−R6, which are the same or different; each−R6,−R7, and−R7a is independently selected from the group
consisting of–H and C1–6 alkyl, wherein:
C1–6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
halogen, which are the same or different;
=Y1 is selected from =O and =NR5;
optionally, one or more of the pairs−R1/−R1a,−R2/−R3,−R5/−R5a, and −R4/−R4a are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a C3–10 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl or a 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl;
optionally, one or more of the pairs−R1/−R2,−R1/−R3,−R1/−R5,−R1/−R5a, −R1a/−R2,−R1a/−R3,−R1a/−R5,−R1a/−R5a,−R2/−R5,−R2/−R5a, −R3/−R5,−R3/−R5a are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring−A−;
A is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl,
3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, and 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl;
wherein−L1 is substituted with one to five moieties−L2−Z and/or−L2'−Y,
preferably−L1 is substituted with one moiety−L2−Z or−L2'−Y, and is optionally further substituted, provided that the hydrogen marked with the asterisk in formula (I') is not replaced by a substituent;
wherein−L2− and−L2'− are independently of each other a single chemical bond or a spacer moiety;
−Z is a carrier moiety; and
−Y is a functional group which may optionally be present in its protected form.
4. The prodrug reagent of claim 3;
wherein−Q is selected from the group consisting of chloride, bromide, fluoride,
nitrophenoxy, imidazolyl, N-hydroxysuccinimidyl, N-hydroxybenzotriazolyl, N-hydroxyazobenzotriazolyl, pentafluorphenoxy, N-hydroxysulfosuccinimidyl, diphenylphosphinomethanethiyl, 2-diphenylphosphinophenoxy,
norbornene-N-hydroxysuccinimidyl, N-hydroxyphthalimide, pyridinoxy,
nonafluoro tert-butyloxy, and hexafluoro isopropyloxy.
5. The prodrug reagent of claim 4;
wherein−Y of formula (I') is selected from the group consisting of:
thiol, maleimide, amine, hydroxyl, carboxylic acid and derivatives, carbonate and derivatives, carbamate and derivatives, isothiocyanate, disulfide, pyridyl disulfide, methylthiosulfonyl, vinylsulfone, aldehyde, ketone, haloacetyl, selenide, azide,−NH−NH2,−O−NH2, a terminal alkyne; a comp z'i):
Figure imgf000129_0001
(z'i);
wherein:
−Y1− and−Y2− are independently of each other−C− or−N−;
−Ra,−Ra',−Ra1, and−Ra1' are independently of each other−H or C1 ^6 alkyl; ax1 is 0 if−Y2− is–N−, and is 1 if−Y2− is–C−;
optionally, the pair−Ra/−Ra1 forms a chemical bond, if−Y2− is−C−; and optionally, the pair−Ra'/−Ra1' are joined together with the atom to which they are attached to form a ring A', if−Y2− is−C−, A' is cyclopropyl or phenyl;a compound of formula (z'ii):
Figure imgf000129_0002
wherein−Y3− is−CH2−, or−NH−;
a comp n f f rm l (z'iii):
Figure imgf000129_0003
i);
a compound of formula (z'iv);
Figure imgf000129_0004
wherein:
−Ra2 and−Ra3 are−H; −Ra2’ and−Ra3’ are–H or are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a 5-membered heterocyclyl ring A1'; and indicates a single or double bond;
a com ound of formula z'v :
Figure imgf000130_0001
wherein:
−Ra4,−Ra4',−Ra5, and−Ra5' are -H;
optionally, the pair−Ra4/−Ra5 forms a chemical bond; and optionally, the pair−Ra4'/−Ra5' are joined together with the atoms to which they are attached to form a ring A2', A2' is 5-membered heterocyclyl; a com ound of formula (z'vi):
Figure imgf000130_0002
wherein:
−Ra6 and−Ra6' are either both C1–6 alkyl or one of−Ra6 and−Ra6' is−H and the other one is selected from C1–6 alkyl,−COORa7,−CONHRa7’, and −CH2ORa7"; and
−Ra7,−Ra7', and−Ra7" are independently of each other−H or C1–4 alkyl; a comp z'vii):
Figure imgf000130_0003
;
a compound of formula (z'viii):
Figure imgf000131_0001
wherein−Ra8,−Ra8', and−Ra8" are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of−H and
Figure imgf000131_0002
alkyl;
a compound of formula (z'ix): (z'ix);
wherein−Ra9 is−H or C1–4 alkyl;
a compound of formula (z'x):
Figure imgf000131_0003
wherein:
−Ra9 i , and
Figure imgf000131_0004
wherein
−Y4− is−C− or−N−;
−Ra12 is selected from the group consisting of−H, −COORa13,−CONRa13Ra13',−CH2NRa13Ra13', and−NRa13CORa13'; and
−Ra13 and−Ra13' are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of−H and C1 ^4 alkyl; −Aa3 is selected from−H, methyl, tert-butyl,−CF3,−COOR,
Figure imgf000132_0001
;
wherein:
each−Y5−,−Y6−,−Y7−, and−Y8− is independently of each other−C− or−N−, provided that no more than 3 of−Y5−,−Y6−,−Y7−, and−Y8− are −N−; and
each of−Y9−,−Y10−,−Y11−,−Y12−, and−Y13− is either−C−,−N−,−S−, or−O−, provided that no more than 4 of−Y9−,−Y10−,−Y11−, −Y12−, and−Y13− are−N−,−S−, or−O−;
a compound of formula (z'xi):
Figure imgf000132_0002
a compound of formula (z'xii): (z'xii);
wherein:
−Ra19 and−Ra18' are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of−H, C1–6 alkyl, C2–6 alkenyl, C2–6 alkynyl,
C3 ^8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z'xiii):
Figure imgf000133_0001
wherein−Ra20 is selected from the group consisting of−H, C1–6 alkyl, C2 ^6 alkenyl, C2–6 alkynyl, C3–8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl;
a compound of formula (z'xiv): (z'xiv);
wherein:
Ar is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; −Y14 is selected from halogen; and
−Ra22,−Ra23,−Ra23' are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of−H, C1–6 alkyl, C2–6 alkenyl, C2–6 alkynyl, C3-– cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl;
a compound of formula (z'xv):
Figure imgf000133_0002
wherein:
Ar is selected from phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; and -Ra24, -Ra2', -Ra24", -Ra24''' are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of−H, C1–6 alkyl, C2–6 alkenyl, C2–6 alkynyl, C3 ^8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl; a compound of formula (z'xvi): (z'xvi);
wherein−Ra25 is selected from the group consisting of−H, C1–6 alkyl, C2 ^6 alkenyl, C2–6 alkynyl, C3–8 cycloalkyl, 3- to 10-membered heterocyclyl, 8- to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, and tetralinyl;
a compound of formula (z'xvii):
Figure imgf000134_0001
wherein−Ra27 and Ra27' are independently of each other−H or C1 ^6 alkyl; a com ound of formula z'xviii : 'xviii);
Figure imgf000134_0002
wherein:
−PPh2 represents a roup havin the following formula:
Figure imgf000134_0003
wherein the dashed line indicates attachment to the rest of the moiety of formula (z'xix); and
−Ra12 is selected from:
Figure imgf000135_0001
;
wherein:
the unmarked dashed line indicates attachment to the rest of the moiety of formula (z'xix);
the dashed line with the asterisk indicates
attachment to−L2'−;
q is 1 or 2; and
−Y14− is−O− or−S−; and
a compound of formula (z'xx):
(z'xx);
wherein the dashed line indicates attachment to−L2'−;
wherein the moieties of formula (z'i), (z'ii), (z'iii), (z'iv), (z'v), (z'vi), (z'vii), (z'viii), (z'ix), (z'x), (z'xi), (z'xii), (z'xiii), (z'xiv), (z'xv), (z'xvi), (z'xvii), and (z'xviii) are substituted with a moiety−L2'− and are optionally further substituted.
6. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or the prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 5;
wherein−Z comprises a C8–18 alkyl group or a polymer with a molecular weight of at least 0.5 kDa.
7. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or the prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 6; wherein−Z comprises at least one of the polymers selected from the group consisting of 2-methacryloyl-oxyethyl phosphoyl cholins, poly(acrylic acids), poly(acrylates), poly(acrylamides), poly(alkyloxy) polymers, poly(amides), poly(amidoamines), poly(amino acids), poly(anhydrides), poly(aspartamides), poly(butyric acids), poly(glycolic acids), polybutylene terephthalates, poly(caprolactones),
poly(carbonates), poly(cyanoacrylates), poly(dimethylacrylamides), poly(esters), poly(ethylenes), poly(ethyleneglycols), poly(ethylene oxides), poly(ethyl phosphates), poly(ethyloxazolines), poly(glycolic acids), poly(hydroxyethyl acrylates), poly(hydroxyethyl-oxazolines), poly(hydroxymethacrylates),
poly(hydroxypropylmethacrylamides), poly(hydroxypropyl methacrylates), poly(hydroxypropyloxazolines), poly(iminocarbonates), poly(lactic acids), poly(lactic-co-glycolic acids), poly(methacrylamides), poly(methacrylates), poly(methyloxazolines), poly(organophosphazenes), poly(ortho esters),
poly(oxazolines), poly(propylene glycols), poly(siloxanes), poly(urethanes), poly(vinyl alcohols), poly(vinyl amines), poly(vinylmethylethers),
poly(vinylpyrrolidones), silicones, celluloses, carbomethyl celluloses, hydroxypropyl methylcelluloses, chitins, chitosans, dextrans, dextrins, gelatins, hyaluronic acids and derivatives, functionalized hyaluronic acids, mannans, pectins, rhamnogalacturonans, starches, hydroxyalkyl starches, hydroxyethyl starches and other carbohydrate-based polymers, xylans, and copolymers thereof.
8. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 7;
wherein−Z comprises a protein.
9. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 8;
wherein−Z comprises a PEG-based polymer comprising at last 10% PEG.
10. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 9;
wherein−Z comprises a water-soluble polymer.
11. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 10;
wherein−Z comprises a PEG-based hydrogel comprising at least 10 % PEG.
12. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 11;
wherein:
−L2− and−L2'− are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of−T−,−C(O)O−,−O−,−C(O)−,−C(O)N(Ry1)−,−S(O)2N(Ry1)−, −S(O)N(Ry1)−,−S(O)2−,−S(O)−,−N(Ry1)S(O)2N(Ry1a)−,−S−, −N(Ry1)−,−OC(ORy1)(Ry1a)−,−N(Ry1)C(O)N(Ry1a)−,−OC(O)N(Ry1)−, C1 ^50 alkyl, C2–50 alkenyl, and C2–50 alkynyl, wherein:
−T−, C1–50 alkyl, C2–50 alkenyl, and C2–50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more−Ry2, which are the same or different; and
C1–50 alkyl, C2–50 alkenyl, and C2–50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of−T−, −C(O)O−,−O−,−C(O)−,−C(O)N(Ry3)−,−S(O)2N(Ry3)−,
−S(O)N(Ry3)−,−S(O)2−,−S(O)−,−N(Ry3)S(O)2N(Ry3a)−,−S−, −N(Ry3)−,−OC(ORy3)(Ry3a)−,−N(Ry3)C(O)N(Ry3a)−, and
−OC(O)N(Ry3)−;
Ry1 and Ry1a are independently of each other selected from the group consisting of −H,−T, C1–50 alkyl, C2–50 alkenyl, and C2–50 alkynyl, wherein:
−T, C1–50 alkyl, C2–50 alkenyl, and C2–50 alkynyl are optionally substituted with one or more ^Ry2, which are the same or different; and C1–50 alkyl, C2–50 alkenyl, and C2–50 alkynyl are optionally interrupted by one or more groups selected from the group consisting of−T−, −C(O)O−,−O−,−C(O)−,−C(O)N(Ry4)−,−S(O)2N(Ry4)−,
−S(O)N(Ry4)−,−S(O)2−,−S(O)−,−N(Ry4)S(O)2N(Ry4a)−,−S−, −N(Ry4)−,−OC(ORy4)(Ry4a)−,−N(Ry4)C(O)N(Ry4a)−, and
−OC(O)N(Ry4)−;
each T is independently selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, indanyl, tetralinyl, C3–10 cycloalkyl, [[3-]] to 10-membered heterocyclyl, [[8-]] to 11-membered heterobicyclyl, 8-to 30-membered carbopolycyclyl, and [[8-]] to 30-membered heteropolycyclyl, wherein:
each T is independently optionally substituted with one or more−Ry2, which are the same or different;
each Ry2 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen,−CN, oxo (=O),−COORy5,−ORy5,−C(O)Ry5,−C(O)N(Ry5Ry5a),−S(O)2N(Ry5Ry5a), −S(O)N(Ry5Ry5a),−S(O)2Ry5,−S(O)Ry5,−N(Ry5)S(O)2N(Ry5aRy5b),−SRy5, −N(Ry5Ry5a),−NO2,−OC(O)Ry5,−N(Ry5)C(O)Ry5a,−N(Ry5)S(O)2Ry5a, −N(Ry5)S(O)Ry5a,−N(Ry5)C(O)ORy5a,−N(Ry5)C(O)N(Ry5aRy5b), −OC(O)N(Ry5Ry5a), and C1–6 alkyl, wherein:
C1–6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different; and
each−Ry3,−Ry3a,−Ry4,−Ry4a,−Ry5,−Ry5a, and−Ry5b is independently selected from the group consisting of–H and C1-6 alkyl, wherein:
C1–6 alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more halogen, which are the same or different.
13. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 12;
wherein L1 is substituted with one moiety−L2−Z or−L2'−Y.
14. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 13;
wherein−R4a is−H which is substituted with−L2−Z or−L2'−Y.
15. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 14;
wherein−R1,−R1a,−R2,−R3,−R4,−R4a,−R5 and−R5a are independently of other selected from−H, C1–6 alkyl, C1–6 alkenyl, C1–6 alkynyl.
16. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 15;
wherein−X1− of is−CR5R5a−.
17. The prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or prodrug reagent of any one of claims 1 to 16;
wherein =Y1 is =O.
18. A pharmaceutical composition comprising:
the prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof of any one of claims 1, 2, and 6 to 17 and
one or more excipients.
19. The prodrug of any one of claims 1, 2, and 6 to 18 or the pharmaceutical composition of claim 18 for use as a medicament.
20. A method of treating, controlling, delaying or preventing in a mammalian patient in need of the treatment, control, delay or prevention of one or more diseases which can be treated with the corresponding drug released from the prodrug of any one of claims 1 to 17, comprising:
the step of administering to said patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of the prodrug of any one of claims 1 to 17 or the pharmaceutical composition of claim 18.
PCT/US2016/034105 2015-05-29 2016-05-25 Prodrugs comprising a pyroglutamate linker WO2016196124A2 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP16804033.5A EP3303365A4 (en) 2015-05-29 2016-05-25 Prodrugs comprising a pyroglutamate linker
US15/577,606 US11298427B2 (en) 2015-05-29 2016-05-25 Prodrugs comprising a pyroglutamate linker

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP15169843 2015-05-29
EP15169843.8 2015-05-29

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016196124A2 true WO2016196124A2 (en) 2016-12-08
WO2016196124A3 WO2016196124A3 (en) 2017-01-19

Family

ID=53276753

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2016/034105 WO2016196124A2 (en) 2015-05-29 2016-05-25 Prodrugs comprising a pyroglutamate linker

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (1) US11298427B2 (en)
EP (1) EP3303365A4 (en)
WO (1) WO2016196124A2 (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018175788A1 (en) 2017-03-22 2018-09-27 Genentech, Inc. Hydrogel cross-linked hyaluronic acid prodrug compositions and methods
US10751417B2 (en) 2017-04-20 2020-08-25 Novartis Ag Sustained release delivery systems comprising traceless linkers
WO2020254606A1 (en) 2019-06-21 2020-12-24 Ascendis Pharma A/S Conjugates of heteroaromatic nitrogen-comprising compounds
WO2020254603A1 (en) 2019-06-21 2020-12-24 Ascendis Pharma A/S CONJUGATES OF π-ELECTRON-PAIR-DONATING HETEROAROMATIC NITROGEN-COMPRISING COMPOUNDS
WO2022029178A1 (en) 2020-08-05 2022-02-10 Ascendis Pharma A/S Conjugates comprising reversible linkers and uses thereof
US11389541B2 (en) 2018-10-03 2022-07-19 Novartis Ag Sustained delivery of angiopoetin-like 3 polypeptides

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108424525B (en) * 2018-04-04 2021-01-15 大连理工大学 Vinyl sulfone-based silicon nanomaterial surface functionalization method

Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003024047A2 (en) 2001-09-06 2003-03-20 Litton Systems, Inc. Reception of a plurality of phase-modulated signals
WO2005099768A2 (en) 2004-03-23 2005-10-27 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Polymeric prodrug with a self-immolative linker
WO2006003014A2 (en) 2004-07-05 2006-01-12 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Hydrogel polymeric conjugates of a prodrug
WO2006136586A2 (en) 2005-06-22 2006-12-28 Complex Biosystems Gmbh N, n-bis- (2-hydroxyethyl) glycine amide as linker in polymer conjugated prodrugs
WO2009095479A2 (en) 2008-02-01 2009-08-06 Ascendis Pharma As Prodrug comprising a self-cleavable linker
WO2011012722A1 (en) 2009-07-31 2011-02-03 Ascendis Pharma As Prodrugs containing an aromatic amine connected by an amido bond to a linker
WO2011012715A1 (en) 2009-07-31 2011-02-03 Ascendis Pharma As Biodegradable polyethylene glycol based water-insoluble hydrogels
WO2011089215A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-07-28 Ascendis Pharma As Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aromatic amine-containing drugs
WO2011089214A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-07-28 Ascendis Pharma As Carrier-linked carbamate prodrug linkers
WO2011089216A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-07-28 Ascendis Pharma As Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aliphatic amine-containing drugs
WO2013024047A1 (en) 2011-08-12 2013-02-21 Ascendis Pharma A/S High-loading water-soluble carrier-linked prodrugs
WO2013024049A1 (en) 2011-08-12 2013-02-21 Ascendis Pharma A/S Protein carrier-linked prodrugs
WO2014056926A1 (en) 2012-10-11 2014-04-17 Ascendis Pharma A/S Hydrogel prodrugs

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120191039A1 (en) * 2009-07-31 2012-07-26 Ascendis Pharma A/S Carrier linked pramipexole prodrugs
WO2011108724A1 (en) 2010-03-04 2011-09-09 味の素株式会社 Prophylactic or therapeutic agent for diabetes or obesity
WO2015006740A2 (en) * 2013-07-11 2015-01-15 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligonucleotide-ligand conjugates and process for their preparation

Patent Citations (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003024047A2 (en) 2001-09-06 2003-03-20 Litton Systems, Inc. Reception of a plurality of phase-modulated signals
WO2005099768A2 (en) 2004-03-23 2005-10-27 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Polymeric prodrug with a self-immolative linker
WO2006003014A2 (en) 2004-07-05 2006-01-12 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Hydrogel polymeric conjugates of a prodrug
WO2006136586A2 (en) 2005-06-22 2006-12-28 Complex Biosystems Gmbh N, n-bis- (2-hydroxyethyl) glycine amide as linker in polymer conjugated prodrugs
WO2009095479A2 (en) 2008-02-01 2009-08-06 Ascendis Pharma As Prodrug comprising a self-cleavable linker
WO2011012715A1 (en) 2009-07-31 2011-02-03 Ascendis Pharma As Biodegradable polyethylene glycol based water-insoluble hydrogels
WO2011012722A1 (en) 2009-07-31 2011-02-03 Ascendis Pharma As Prodrugs containing an aromatic amine connected by an amido bond to a linker
WO2011089215A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-07-28 Ascendis Pharma As Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aromatic amine-containing drugs
WO2011089214A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-07-28 Ascendis Pharma As Carrier-linked carbamate prodrug linkers
WO2011089216A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-07-28 Ascendis Pharma As Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aliphatic amine-containing drugs
WO2013024047A1 (en) 2011-08-12 2013-02-21 Ascendis Pharma A/S High-loading water-soluble carrier-linked prodrugs
WO2013024049A1 (en) 2011-08-12 2013-02-21 Ascendis Pharma A/S Protein carrier-linked prodrugs
US20140323402A1 (en) 2011-08-12 2014-10-30 Ascendis Phama A/S Protein Carrier-Linked Prodrugs
WO2014056926A1 (en) 2012-10-11 2014-04-17 Ascendis Pharma A/S Hydrogel prodrugs

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
GUDE, LETTERS IN PEPTIDE SCIENCE, vol. 9, no. 4, 2002, pages 203 - 206
See also references of EP3303365A4

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018175788A1 (en) 2017-03-22 2018-09-27 Genentech, Inc. Hydrogel cross-linked hyaluronic acid prodrug compositions and methods
US11642415B2 (en) 2017-03-22 2023-05-09 Ascendis Pharma A/S Hydrogel cross-linked hyaluronic acid prodrug compositions and methods
US10751417B2 (en) 2017-04-20 2020-08-25 Novartis Ag Sustained release delivery systems comprising traceless linkers
US11389541B2 (en) 2018-10-03 2022-07-19 Novartis Ag Sustained delivery of angiopoetin-like 3 polypeptides
WO2020254606A1 (en) 2019-06-21 2020-12-24 Ascendis Pharma A/S Conjugates of heteroaromatic nitrogen-comprising compounds
WO2020254603A1 (en) 2019-06-21 2020-12-24 Ascendis Pharma A/S CONJUGATES OF π-ELECTRON-PAIR-DONATING HETEROAROMATIC NITROGEN-COMPRISING COMPOUNDS
WO2022029178A1 (en) 2020-08-05 2022-02-10 Ascendis Pharma A/S Conjugates comprising reversible linkers and uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US11298427B2 (en) 2022-04-12
US20190216940A1 (en) 2019-07-18
WO2016196124A3 (en) 2017-01-19
EP3303365A4 (en) 2019-04-24
EP3303365A2 (en) 2018-04-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3193941B1 (en) Prodrugs comprising an aminoalkyl glycine linker
US11298427B2 (en) Prodrugs comprising a pyroglutamate linker
EP2906617B1 (en) Hydrogel prodrugs
KR102235868B1 (en) Vegf neutralizing prodrugs for the treatment of ocular conditions
EP2906245B1 (en) Diagnosis, prevention and treatment of diseases of the joint
AU2017295938C1 (en) Conjugation method for carrier-linked prodrugs
EP2988732B1 (en) Modified hydrogels
EP4084872A1 (en) Conjugates undergoing intramolecular rearrangements

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16804033

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2016804033

Country of ref document: EP

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16804033

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2